Echo 1-17

EXPEDITIONARY COMMUNICATIONS COURSE
Annex E
1-17
Student Handouts & Supplemental Material

Table of Contents
ECC E01 Wideband Networks Overview
ECC E02 Network Synchronization and Timing
ECC E03 Network Encryption
ECC E04 Signal Conversion
ECC E05 AN-MRC 142C Digital Wideband Transmission System (DWTS)
ECC E06 Strategic Satellite Architecture Overview
ECC E07 Satellite Earth Terminals
ECC E08 AN-USC-65 Lightweight Multiband Satellite Terminal (LMST)
ECC E10 AN-TSC-154 Secure Mobile Anti-Jam Reliable Tactical Terminal (SMART-T)
ECC E11 AN-TRC-170 Tropospheric Scatter Microwave Radio Terminal
ECC E12 Wireless Point to Point Link (WPPL)
ECC E13 Very Small Aperture Terminal (VSAT)
ECC E14 Multichannel Radio Network Documentation and Diagrams
ECC E19 Communication Control (COMMCON)
ECC E20 Systems Control
ECC E22 Hazardous Materials Storage and Handling
ECC E23 Power Planning for Communications System
ECC E24 Wideband Network Troubleshooting
ECC EXX Network on the Move

UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS
COMMUNICATION TRAINING BATTALION
MARINE CORPS COMMUNICATION-ELECTRONICS SCHOOL
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
TWENTYNINE PALMS, CALIFORNIA 92278-8251
STUDENT HANDOUT
WIDEBAND NETWORKS OVERVIEW
ECC E01
10/1/2015
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO MULTICHANNEL RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
In general, guided transmission media such as twisted-pair,

coaxial, and fiber optic cable face limitations in the manner in which
they are employed. Many locations cannot be securely and cost-
effectively cabled by using wires— this is where unguided, wireless
transmission media such as multichannel radio systems (one channel for
transmit and one for receive) come into play.
Suppose a Combat Outpost housing a reinforced infantry platoon located
just 20 km from the nearest Forward Operating Base rises to strategic
prominence requiring the immediate relocation and placement of an
infantry regimental headquarters in its place. Because of rapid
advancements on the battlefield, operational planning teams were unable
to foresee the importance of this location as coalition forces
transitioned to security and stability operations in the region. With
critical infrastructure lacking, the MEF Commanding General has ordered
the immediate build-out of said infrastructure. The MEF G-6 has assessed
that the cost and time to break ground, lay conduit, and pull cable are
cost- and time-prohibitive. To bypass that entire operation,
multichannel radio systems could be used between the main Forward
Operating Base and the remote Combat Outpost to extend critical
communications services to enable the commander the ability to command
and control forward-deployed troops via a more robust communications
capability set (vice single-channel radio) to include the voice and data
services discussed later in this course.
Deployment of unguided media (wireless) such as multichannel radio
systems is faster and less costly than the deployment of cable,
particularly where there is little to no existing infrastructure.
Unguided media is also useful where environmental circumstances make it
impossible or cost-prohibitive to use cable (e.g., combat zones, the
Sahara Desert, Trans-Atlantic, shipboard life). Additionally, one of the
biggest jumps in Marine Corps technology is the commercial idea of
network convergence. Having separate systems for phones, computers,
and radios is great for fault tolerance and has provided a vehicle for
making those systems the best they can be on their own. On the other
hand, a step towards a network centric Marine Corps is the idea of
integrating all of these systems on a singular backbone utilizing a
relatively new idea called convergence.
There are, however, a few disadvantages associated with employing
wireless media. Historically, wireless solutions support much lower data
rates than wire solutions do. Because of new developments in wireless
broadband, this is becoming less of an issue. Wireless is also greatly
affected by external impairments, such as the impact of adverse weather
(think DirecTV in a strong thunderstorm) and terrain, so reliability can
be difficult to guarantee.
The vast majority of wireless broadband solutions (military and
civilian; terrestrial and satellite-based) operate in the microwave
spectrum— primary exception in the Marine Corps inventory being the
AN/MRC-142C Digital Wideband Transmission System (to be covered in ECC
E09).
Frequencies in the microwave portion of the spectrum are subject
to the uncertainties of the physical environment. Metals in the area,
2
precipitation, and a number of other factors can cause reflections, and
therefore degradations and echoes. The higher in elevation we move
away from land-based systems (cell phones, two-way radios, etc.), the
better the performance due to less intrusion.
The impact of precipitation on microwave frequencies can be great.
Microwave beams are small, and as you go up into the higher spectrum
bands, the waveforms get smaller and smaller. Pretty soon, they are small
enough to be absorbed by a raindrop and then scattered in all directions.
Therefore, in wet atmospheric conditions, there is a great potential for
problems with microwave frequencies. As a result, practicing network
diversity—using both terrestrial and non- terrestrial alternatives—is
critical.
An important design criterion is that microwave requires line of
sight and a highly directional beam. Microwave frequencies require a
clear, unobstructed view. It cannot move through any obstacles, even
things not thought to be obstacles, such as leaves on a tree.
Technologies that depend on line of sight may work brilliantly in areas
that have the appropriate terrain and climate, and not perform very well
where there are many obstacles or a lot of precipitation. Furthermore,
line of sight is restricted by the curvature of the earth, which
interrupts the line of sight at about 35 miles for systems organic to
the Marine Corps.
MULTICHANNEL RADIO SYSTEMS IN THE MARINE CORPS
In the Marine Corps, multichannel radio transmission systems

provide reliable, flexible, high-capacity transmission paths for the
extension of MAGTF tactical communications networks and/or the Defense
Information Systems Network (DISN). The DISN is responsible for providing
voice, video, and data services such as NIPRNET, SIPRNET, DSN, U.S.
Combined Enterprise Regional Information Exchange (CENTRIX), etc. to
units located throughout the theater of operations.
Specific transmission systems (terrestrial or satellite-based) are
employed, depending on terrain, distance, and user requirements, to
provide flexibility and adaptability to support the tactical situation
and overall scheme of maneuver as dictated by the Commander.
MULTICHANNEL RADIO EQUIPMENT
As stated in the single-channel radio annex, radio frequency

transmission terminals utilize wireless technology to transmit modulated
signals to carry information to a distant end. Additionally, we learned
that with increased frequency comes an increased capacity to carry
information.
As technology has advanced and with the influx of overseas
contingency funds related to the wars in Iraq, Afghanistan, and other
locations worldwide, the Marine Corps’ telecommunications capability has
undergone a vast transformation. One field in particular that has seen
drastic improvement is the multichannel radio field. As battlefield
command and control system requirements evolve, the need
3
for adaptable, secure, and reliable high-bandwidth communications
terminals will also increase.
Systems within the Marine Corps inventory today can be broken down
into two categories:
1. Terrestrial Radio Frequency Terminals: Include line-of-sight

terminals that operate in the ultra high frequency (UHF) portion of the
spectrum like the AN/MRC-142C Digital Wideband Transmission System and
those that operate in the super high frequency (SHF) microwave portion
of the spectrum like the AN/TRC-170 (V5) Tropospheric Scatter Microwave
Radio Terminal, the AN/TSC-178 Wireless Point-to-Point Link Version D
(WPPL-D).
2. Tactical Satellite Terminals:

Include satellite terminals that
operate in the SHF portion of the spectrum
for line-of-sight relay via satellite like
the AN/USC-65 Lightweight Multiband Satellite
Terminal (LMST) (phasing out but you may find
them at “Big Box” units), AN/TSC-156C Phoenix
(legacy), TPS-80 G/ATOR, and the AN/TSC-186D
Support Wide Area Network (SWAN-D). An
additional terminal, the AN/TSC-154 (SMART-T) utilizes frequencies in
the SHF portion of the spectrum for its downlink (receive segment) and
frequencies in the extremely high frequency (EHF) portion of the
spectrum for its uplink (transmit segment).
As a rule of thumb, multichannel radio transmission systems are
generally located near headquarters elements, rear areas, expeditionary
airfields, and major command and control (C2) facilities. The nature of
expeditionary communications, however, is a constantly changing
environment; units on the Forward Edge of the Battle Area continue to be
fielded communications suites of increased capabilities to support
growing command and control system requirements.
MULTICHANNEL RADIO PERSONNEL
As with the cyber and wire disciplines within the Marine Corps
communications occupational field, the multichannel radio field has
specially trained personnel to plan for, install, operate, and maintain
the aforementioned multichannel radio equipment:
1. MOS 0620—Tactical Communications Planning and Engineering

Officer (TCPEO): Supervises and manages the planning, installation,
operation, and maintenance of transmission and multiplexing systems as
well as circuit integration of all elements of wire, radio, and data
communications in support of the MAGTF and joint networks. They also
develop the documentation required to ensure effective employment of
communications transmission systems in current and future operations
(WO-CWO5).
4
2. MOS 0629—Radio Chief: Senior enlisted advisor on all
equipment related to transmission equipment (SSgt-GySgt).
3. MOS 0621—Field Radio Operator: Installs, operates, and

maintains (at the first echelon), multichannel/media equipment such as
the AN/MRC-142C (Pvt-Sgt).
a. MOS 0622 (Legacy) Digital (multi-channel) Wideband

Transmission Equipment Operator: Installs, operates, and maintain the
AN/MRC-142C. Formerly a primary MOS, now an additional or A-MOS.
Marines will refer to 0622 as they reference their ability to operate
the MRC-142 or WPPL-D.
4. MOS 0623—Tropospheric Scatter Radio Multichannel Equipment

Operator: Installs, operates, and maintains (at the first echelon),
the AN/TRC-170 (V5) multichannel radio system (Pvt-Sgt).
5. MOS 0627—Military Satellite Terminal Operator: Installs,

operates, and maintains the AN/USC-65 (LMST), TPS-80 G/ATOR, , and the
AN/TSC-154 (SMART-T) (Pvt-Sgt).
PART 2: INTRODUCTION TO MULTIPLEXING
With the above options for transporting data over long distances
via multichannel radio, consider the fact that we as Marines require
multiple networks to fight today’s fight. NIPRNET, SIPRNET, CENTRIXS,
secure and non-secure phone networks, and video teleconference are
examples of such networks. Refer to the example below:
NIPRNET
SIPRNET
DSN
5
Does the antenna hill at each node seem similar to single-channel
radio? Considering the fact that today’s multichannel radio systems weigh
at least 1,000 lbs. and cost upward of $100,000 to several million
dollars; does it seem like overkill? One transceiver and one antenna (or
more) per service provided could require quite the logistical
footprint. Imagine having to
install, operate, and maintain five
multichannel radio links to each of your
higher, adjacent, and subordinate units in
addition to your other support requirements.
This would be quite the daunting task, not to
mention extremely expensive.
Telegraph companies experienced a
similar challenge when trying to establish
connectivity to stations near and far.
Telegraph lines connecting major stations
quickly became saturated with traffic.
Multiple lines became a must. As a result,
telegraph line poles similar to the one
pictured became commonplace. Consequently,
Western Union developed technology capable of carrying two or more
signals on a single physical connection called multiplexing.
This multiplexing technology is used today to aid in relieving some
of the logistical and financial strain previously mentioned. This
process, however, requires specialized equipment known as multiplexers,
which are capable of both separating and combining multiple signals or
data streams into individual channels for long- range transmission. The
multiplexer device is actually a combination of a multiplexer (mux) that
takes multiple inputs or circuits and combines them into a single signal
(known as an aggregate or trunk) and a de-multiplexer (demux) that
separates these aggregates back into individual circuits for
dissemination to the appropriate output.
MUX AGGREGATE MUX

SLICE SLICE
3302 3301
MULTIPLEXING EQUIPMENT
While this multiplexing technology has its obvious advantages, it

does have some drawbacks. As Communicators, we seek to minimize single
points of failure. Multiplexers were expensive and were, in most units,
considered high-demand/low-density items. Equipment failure or improper
programming can result in major network outages causing multiple services
to fail.
6
Despite the drawbacks, multiplexers, like multichannel radio
systems, were a critical component of the Marine Corps deployed network
system. With proper planning, the disadvantages can be mitigated to
provide a reliable yet cost-effective communications solution to meet
your commander’s command and control requirements.
The Marine Corps multiplexer inventory consisted of two primary
systems— the Tactical Access Concentrator 300 or more commonly, the TAC-
300 and the Promina 400 which is a component of the Marine Corps- specific
suite known as the Deployable Integrated Transport Suite (DITS). The
TAC-300 is an organic component of the AN/MRC-142C and will not
typically be employed elsewhere. The DITS could be found as low as a
regimental headquarters and typically supports the transport of services
via larger “big box” multichannel radio transmission systems to be
discussed later in the annex.
MULTIPLEXING PERSONNEL
As with multichannel radio, multiplexers are typically installed,

operated, and maintained by specially trained Marines with the following
occupational specialties:
1. MOS 0620—Tactical Communications Planning and Engineering

Officer (TCPEO): Supervises and manages the planning, installation,
operation, and maintenance of transmission and multiplexing systems as
well as circuit integration of all elements of wire, radio, and data
communications in support of the MAGTF and joint networks. They also
develop the documentation required to ensure effective employment of
communications transmission systems in current and future operations
(WO-CWO5).
2. MOS 0629—Radio Chief: Senior enlisted advisor on all

equipment related multichannel radio equipment such as the AN/MRC-142C
to include the TAC-300 multiplexer (SSgt-GySgt).
3. MOS 0621—Field Radio Operator: Installs, operates, and

maintains (at the first echelon), the multichannel/media equipment
such as the AN/MRC-142C to include the TAC-300 multiplexer (Pvt-Sgt).
4. MOS 2823-Technical Control Chief: Supervises the operation

of technical control equipment in MAGTF and joint communications
networks. Evaluate technical supportability/limitations of
communications equipment, draft systems architecture and communication
plans, and coordinate technical interface and restoration issues
(SSgt-MGySgt).
5. MOS 2821-Technical Controller: Operates technical control

equipment such as Promina-based multiplexers to locate faults and
degradations in communication networks. Typically located in key
positions to test transmission quality of high-capacity communication
circuits passing through technical control equipment (Pvt-Sgt).
7
LEGACY VS. EOIP
Up until recently, Marines have been using the TAC-300 and the
Deployable Integrated Transport Suite (DITS) equipment to multiplex
voice, video, and data signals. Although still good for backup systems,
these methods are now outdated and greatly increase your physical
footprint.
As many of you who enjoy any commercial internet and phone
provider service know, these signals can be integrated into one
without the extra multiplexor. Take a look at the legacy equipment
string and notice the clear separation of the NIPR and SIPR routers in
this system. Observe the difference in the EoIP equipment string.
Not only is the SIPR traffic being line encrypted through the NIPR
router, all of the physical connections are Ethernet which provides a
clear advantage in the way of higher throughput (in comparison to
serial cabling). You should also notice that there is no PHYSICAL
bulk encryption device although bulk encryption is being provided in
this equipment string.
8
While we have moved away from hardware multiplexing, we still deal
in aggregate data streams between multiple different networks. Modern
routers remove the necessity for a standalone hardware router (TAC-300).
As we move into an increasingly IP centric world, the volume of
information has increased especially when we were in a joint environment
having to share information on several levels of classified networks.
Black Core routing as we will learn throughout the course is convergence
routing – convergence is the state of a set of routers that have the
same topological information about the internetwork in which they
operator. In other words, in a converged network all routers “agree” on
what the network topology looks like. The Marine Corps has been slow in
updating its hardware but it is moving into modern networks and has
already made strides.
WIDEBAND NETWORK SUPPORT EQUIPMENT AND CONCEPTS
Timing is paramount in communications. Just as we rely on timing

to support things like single-channel radio frequency hopping and clock
rates on routers, we use timing to ensure the synchronization of
multiplexing and multichannel radio systems. The receiver has to be in
synch with the transmitter to ensure that the message is received in
its entirety.
Additionally, the transmission of high-speed data and voice
services over long distances, whether guided or unguided, requires that
we convert our signals into more usable formats (most commonly NRZ for
short distances and CDI for long) depending on requirements.
Finally, as Marines, we are always concerned with security. As
Communicators, we ensure the security of our network services through
the use of encryption. Just like single-channel radio, we utilize COMSEC
material in specialized encryption devices to protect our information.
These topics and many more will be discussed in further detail in
the classes to follow in Annex E.
REFERENCES
1. MCWP 3-40.3, MAGTF Communications System

2. CJCSM 6231.04B, Manual for Employing Joint Tactical Communications
– Joint Transmission Systems
3. Voice & Data Communications Handbook, 5th Edition
4. Fundamentals of Telecommunications
5. Telecommunication System Engineering, 3rd Edition
6. Newton’s Telecom Dictionary, 24th Edition
7. Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS) Telecom
Glossary 2011
9
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
SYNCHRONIZATION AND NETWORK TIMING
ECC E02
10/1/2015
ENABLING LEARNING OBJECTIVES
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED
1. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Bit Error per

Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS) Telecom
Glossary 2011 (0602-PLAN-1103bn).
2. Without the aid of reference, define in writing

Synchronization per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-
PLAN-1103bo).
3. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Slip per

Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS) Telecom
Glossary 2011 (0602-PLAN-1103bp).
4. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Plesiochronous

per Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Manual 6231.04B (Manual for
Employing Joint Tactical Communications – Joint Transmission System)
(0602-PLAN-1103bq).
5. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Stratum per

Synchronization of Digital Telecommunications Networks (0602-PLAN-
1103br).
6. Without the aid of reference, define in writing External

Timing per Fundamentals of Telecommunications (0602-PLAN-1103bs).
7. Without the aid of reference, define in writing the purpose of

a Primary Reference Source per CJCSM 6231.04B (Manual for Employing
Joint Tactical Communications – Joint Transmission System) (0602-PLAN-
1103bt).
8. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Clock Recovery

Timing per Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS)
Telecom Glossary 2011 (0602-PLAN-1103bu).

a Buffer per Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (ATIS)
Telecom Glossary 2011 (0602-PLAN-1103bv).
2
INTRODUCTION
As emphasized throughout the course to this point, time and timing

are important factors in digital transmission. For this discussion,
consider a PC sending out,
in series, a continuous run of marks and
spaces. Those readers who have some
familiarity with Morse Code will recall
that the spaces between dots and dashes
told the operator where letters ended and
where words ended. The sending device or
transmitter delivers a continuous series
of characters to the line, each
consisting of five, six, seven, eight, or
nine elements (bits) per character. A
receiving device starts its print cycle
when the transmitter starts sending and
if perfectly in step with the
transmitter, can be expected to provide
good printed copy with few, if any, errors
at the receiving end.
It is obvious that when signals
are generated by one machine and received by another, the speed of the
receiving machine must be the same or very close to that of the
transmitting machine. When the receiver is a motor-driven device— timing,
stability, and accuracy are dependent on the accuracy and stability of
the speed of rotation of the motors used. Most simple data-telegraph
receivers sample at the presumed center of the signal element. It follows
therefore, that whenever a receiving device accumulates timing error of
more than 50% of the period of one bit, it will print in error.
The need for some sort of synchronization is illustrated in the

figure above. A five-unit code is employed (five bits per character),
and it shows three characters transmitted sequentially. The vertical
arrows are receiver sampling points, which are points in time. Receiving
timing begins when the first pulse is received. If there is a 5% timing
difference between the transmitter and receiver, the first sampling at
the receiver will be 5% away from the center of the transmitted pulse.
At the end of the tenth pulse or signal element, the receiver may sample
in error. This means that timing error accumulates at 5% per received
signal element and when there is a 50% accumulated error, the sampling
will now be performed at an incorrect
3
bit position. The eleventh signal element will be sampled in error, and
all subsequent elements will be errors. This is referred to as a bit
error or a bit that is transferred from the source to the destination
within the assigned time slot, but that when delivered is of a different
value from that sent from the source. If the timing error between
transmitting machine and receiving machine is 2%, the cumulative error
in timing would cause the receiving device to receive all characters in
error after the 25th element (bit).
NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION THEORY
Synchronization is a networking term that applies to a state where

data or information arrives and departs from connected devices at
coordinated times so that data is neither lost nor jumbled.
Synchronization is critical with multiplexing and multichannel radio,
where high volumes of information are carried to multiple nodes.
Communicating devices must be synchronized to know when to receive or
transmit information and on which channel or path. If the timing of
arrival or transmission is off, then the information will be distorted.
This distorted, jumbled, or lost data such as that which was mentioned
in the introduction manifests as a slip. A slip is the repetition or
deletion of a block of bits in a synchronous bit stream due to inadequate
synchronization of the two clocks controlling the transmission and
reception of the signals that represent the symbols. Regardless of
whether voice, data, video, or image traffic is present, the proper
presentation of a digital stream of 1s and 0s is contingent on the timed
arrival between the two ends.
When a pulse-code modulation (PCM) bit stream is transmitted over
a telecommunication link, there must be synchronization at three
different levels: (1) bit, (2) time slot, and (3) frame.
1. Bit Synchronization: Bit synchronization refers to the need for

the transmitter (coder) and receiver (decoder) to operate at the same
bit rate. It also refers to the requirement that the receiver decision
point be exactly at the mid-position of the incoming bit. Bit
synchronization assures that the bits will not be misread by the
receiver. As a digital stream of 1s and 0s is delivered to the line, the
timing (or clocking) of the bit is important. The transmitter should be
sending bits at the same rate the receiver can take them in. Any
difference, faster or slower, could result in lost bits. Therefore, the
bits must occur at a fixed time interval. If the timing is off enough,
the pulse can wind up in the wrong time slot. This is called “jitter.”
2. Time Slot Synchronization: Whenever several links are connected

or routed through a network processor, switching system, or end device,
the potential for lost bits, or degradation of the link increases
exponentially. Using the pulse code modulation technique, 8 bits are
encoded from each sample of information. These 8 bits are then assembled
and placed into a time slot. As signals and links are processed through
a network, it is the 8-bit pattern that is routed
4
from time slot to time slot. Should a slippage or mismatch occur,
multiple streams of information will be lost.
3. Frame Synchronization: After the data stream of 192 bits of

information is assembled (8 bits x 24 channels), an extra overhead bit
is added to let both transmitter and receiver know the boundaries of the
frame (think of it as a start/stop bit sequence).
The overall object of network synchronization is to

minimize/eliminate bit errors and frame slips. Received signals may be
corrupted along the transmission path by noise and imperfect clock
recovery circuits caused by jitter and wander. This will create a network
with a high bit error and/or frame slip rate. These bit errors and
frame slips manifest themselves as:
 A study on the effects of controlled slips on a facsimile

transmission found that a single slip caused distortion or missing
lines. A slip can wipe out several scan lines (up to eight
horizontal lines, equivalent to missing about 2 millimeters of
vertical space). If slips occurred continuously, the affected pages
would need to be retransmitted.
 For data transmitted on a POTS channel, a slip may cause a drop-
out lasting from 10 milliseconds to 1.5 seconds, depending on the
data rate and coding.
 For digital video transmission (video teleconferencing, for
example), tests show that a slip may cause segments of the picture
to be distorted or frames to freeze for periods of up to
6 seconds. The seriousness and length of the impairment depends
on the video coding and compression algorithm. The impairment is
more serious for low bit rate encoding systems.
 In data transport protocols, slips reduce transmission throughput,
requiring retransmission of corrupted data units.
 Encrypted services are greatly impacted by slips. A slip may result
in the loss of crypto synch or worse, the encryption key. The loss
of connectivity between cryptographic devices causes the
transmission to cease until communication between devices can be
re-established.
While these can be commonplace within a communications network,

they can be mitigated and almost eliminated by ensuring that there is a
reliable clocking source to distribute accurate timing throughout your
network.
NETWORK TIMING
Timing is the glue that holds a communications network together.

Timing ensures that exchanged information is synchronized across the
different layers of transmissions and multiplexing. Timing sources,
which are typically based on the decay of radioactive elements as they
provide a high degree of accuracy, are either embedded into certain
5
types of equipment such as a multichannel radio or serve as standalone
devices that interface with a network. The most common timing scheme
employed in deployed networks is established using a plesiochronous
approach. That is, when two networks operate with clock sources of
sufficiently high stability such that signals in the two networks are
nearly synchronous, the network is plesiochronous. Each network location
has identical high-stability clocks operating at the same nominal rate.
Such stability can only be achieved with atomic, rubidium, or cesium
clocks. The accuracy and stability of each clock are such that there
is almost complete coincidence in time- keeping and is classified in a
four-level hierarchy as defined by American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) into stratum levels based on performance (quality or accuracy
over time). Each node (with multi-channel radio and multiplexers), no
matter how small, must have such high-precision clocks.
A number of military systems today use external timing— a timing
reference obtained from a source, such as a navigation system, external
to the given system. Switch clocks use disciplined oscillators slaved
to an external radio
source. One of the most popular today is GPS
(geographical positioning system), which
disseminates universal coordinated time
(UTC). GPS is a multiple-satellite system
where there are always three or four
satellites in view at once anywhere on the
Earth’s surface. Its time-transfer
capability is in the 10 nanoseconds to 100
nanoseconds range from UTC. In North American
synchronization parlance, it
provides timing at the stratum-1 level which is the most accurate
(minimum long-term accuracy of 1 x 10-11 which equates to a drift of 1
cycle in 100,000,000,000 cycles). Stratum-1 clocks do not receive timing
from an outside source— they are designed to provide timing to lower
strata equipment. At this minimum accuracy, a properly calibrated source
will provide bit-stream timing that will not slip more than once every
72 days. We expect more and more digital networks to adopt the GPS
external synchronization scheme. It adds notably to a network’s
survivability.
Distributed devices throughout a network (e.g., multiplexers,

signal converters) may have clocks of varying accuracy embedded. The
master clocking source in a network is referred to as the Primary
Reference Source (PRS). Distributed devices derive or recover their
6
clocking from the PRS via a received signal so that the entire network
and all associated network elements maintain synchronization (Clock
Recovery Timing). To support DISN service timing requirements, all new
and existing clock equipment must be disciplined by a PRS traceable to
a secure or standalone stratum-1 timing reference of stability.
Notice that both 6th Marine Regiment and 1st Battalion, 6th Marines
have a PRS at their nodes— an example of plesiochronous timing. Look
closer and you will notice that the timing source directly connected to
the CV-HTU-16M (signal converter to be introduced in ECC E04) — an
example of external timing; the timing source is not internal to another
device such as a multiplexer or signal converter. Finally, notice that
the flow of timing both traverses the wide area network connection but
also flows through the backside network. The components on each side of
the CV-HTU-16M use the timing reference to synchronize operations as
well— an example of clock recovery timing.
SLICE SLICE
3302 3302
TAC-300 KIV-7M KIV-7M TAC-300
KIV-7 KIV-7
If, for whatever reason, a stratum-1 source is not available at

the node, the node’s clock should be configured to slave timing from the
received signal produced by another node.
If a stratum-1 clock is not available within the network, choose
the clock with the highest stratum level to serve as the master clock
and slave all other equipment to that source.
7
POTENTIAL SYNCHRONIZATION PROBLEMS
When a digital system is scheduled to receive a bit, it expects

to do just that. However, clocking or timing differences between the
transmitter and receiver can exist. Therefore, while the receiver is
expecting a bit that the transmitter has not sent, a slip occurs. There
will most likely be slips present because of multiple factors in any
network. These can result from the two clocks at the ends being off or
from problems that can occur along the link (signal degradation, etc.).
Along the link, problems can be accommodated. The use of bit
stuffing or the insertion of non-information bits into data to
synchronize bit streams that do not necessarily have the same bit rates
prior to multiplexing helps. Each device along the link has a buffer
capability. This buffer creates a simple means of maintaining
synchronization. A buffer is a temporary storage medium used to
compensate for a difference in rate of flow of data, or time of occurrence
of events when transferring data from one device to another. Buffers
are usually located between two different devices that have different
abilities or speeds for handling data. A buffer is used to correct
small discrepancies in the time the data is received. The received data
is stored, then the equipment’s internal clock processes the data,
bringing the bits into the equipment in synchronization with the unit’s
internal timing. Common examples of this include electronic skip
protection (ESP, anti-skip, anti-shock, G-Shock, etc.) used in compact
disc players in the 1990’s and the buffering of streaming video on
YouTube prior to viewing.
The buffer is an asynchronous first-in, first-out (FIFO) shift
register. Data can be entered into the buffer and withdrawn at different
rates. Data is clocked into the buffer by the clock associated with the
received data and is clocked out of the buffer by the local clock. Since
the local clock controls the output rate of the buffer, the incoming
digital bit stream is retimed with the frequency of the local clock. If
the receive group clock rate is faster than the local clock rate, the
buffer will eventually overflow and then re-center. Conversely, if the
received clock rate is slower than the local clock rate, the buffer will
eventually underflow and then re-center. Each time a buffer re-centers
(or resets), bit count integrity is lost and synchronization must be
reestablished.
When a slippage occurs or if a problem exists in the network
buffers, the retransmission of a frame or frames of information will be
required. For voice, this is not too bad, but for data transmission
requests, this will affect the throughput of the link and potentially
increase the burden on other systems to detect and correct the errors.
A buffer is used when the stratum accuracy desired (stratum-1) is
already established in the system. Buffers are located at incoming ports
and outgoing ports of transmission, multiplexing, and switching systems.
If a frame slip occurs due to a clock system in a holdover condition
(it has lost synch with the master), what is the penalty? Does the
connected equipment stop working? Not usually. Voice
8
equipment tends to re-acquire frame synchronization quickly, resulting
in a pop or click, which is not usually a problem. Data circuits lose
some number of bits depending on the data rate being transmitted, and on
whether or not a forward error correction is being used (some networks
can self-heal/reaquire lost frames which we will learn about more in a
later annex). Some multiplex and/or routing equipment provides add and
drop services interrupt all output/outbound trunks while a new source of
or timing synchronization is acquired. Such interruptions, if due to
circuit noise, may render a network temporarily useless, as the slip
causes further slips downstream (error or slip multiplication).
A Clock System provides a stable frequency source during circuit

impairments. The connected equipment will not be affected until the clock
holdover drift results in a slip. A stable clock will change a network
that experiences problems two or three times a day to one that maintains
timing through a major trunk and/or network outage. The network will
continue to operate without impairment until the outage is repaired, as
long as the repair time is comparable to the time of the first frame
slip. In the Marine Corps we circumvent this by striving to always have
an ability to pull stratum-1 timing. Even in the case of slave/master
relationship, if the slave falls off the trunk, it can still pull time
locally due to weather, malfunction, or any slew of errors that much
easier as the networks are synched independently.
Since Occasionally slips will always occur, the best one can do
is to minimize their rate of occurrence. Through careful network
engineering, addition of stratum-1 clock systems, near perfect timing
may be achieved reasonably with excellent reliability and
maintainability.
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
When developing a network architecture, consider the relative

accuracy of the timing sources in each piece of equipment (refer to
equipment Technical Manuals). Select the most accurate timing source as
the Primary Reference Source for each node in the network. Also, use a
multiple, independent clock approach vice a single timing source. In
tactical networks, it is neither feasible nor desirable to tie all
equipment to a single timing reference, although depending on the unit,
this may be unavoidable. If possible, have a reliable, stratum-1 clock
source at two locations, Primary and Alternate Technical Control
Facilities. This will provide ample redundancy to prevent service
interruption in case of catastrophic failure at one of the two locations.
SUMMARY
Digital bit streams must be synchronized to ensure that bits are

not incorrectly interpreted by transmitting and receiving devices
9
within a telecommunications network. Furthermore, network performance
and reliability are functions of synchronization quality. Good timing in
a network is essential if continuous error-free performance is desired.
When good timing is present in a telecommunications network, the same
clock frequency is present both at the transmitting and receiving ends
of a specific communications link. Due to the complexity of today’s
multi-nodal telecommunications networks, this means maintaining the same
clock frequency at every point or node in the network. Bit errors and
frame slips ultimately manifest themselves to users as degraded
services, or in the extreme, lengthy service interruptions. During combat
operations, degraded voice, video, and data services or lengthy service
interruptions may result in loss of life for those Marines relying on
the services you provide. In the end, timing is everything.
REFERENCES

3. Synchronization of Digital Telecommunications Networks
Glossary 201
10
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
NETWORK ENCRYPTION
ECC E03
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED
1. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Encryption per

Newton's Telecom Dictionary, 24th Edition (0602-PLAN-1103cb).
2. Without the aid of reference, define in writing RED/BLACK

Isolation per Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Manual (CJCSM)
6231.05B (Joint Communications Security) (0602-PLAN-1103cc).
3. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Communications

Security (COMSEC) per Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Manual
(CJCSM) 6231.05B (Joint Communications Security) (0602-PLAN-1103ce).
4. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Transmission

Security (TRANSEC) per Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Manual
(CJCSM) 6231.05B (Joint Communications Security) (0602-PLAN-1103cd).
5. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the maximum

data rate of the KIV-19/19A per Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff
Manual (CJCSM) 6231.05B (Joint Communications Security) (0602-PLAN-
1103kd).

data rate of the KIV-7M per KIV-7M Programmable, Multi-Channel
Encryptor Installation, Configuration, and Operation Instructions
(0602-PLAN-1103cf).
7. Without the aid of reference, define in writing the scale of

employment for the KG-175 TACLANE per TACLANE-Micro (KG-175D)
Datasheet (0602-PLAN-1103li).
8. Without the aid of reference, define in writing the maximum

data rate of the KG-175D TACLANE-Micro per TACLANE-Micro (KG-175D)
Datasheet (0602-PLAN-1103lj).
9. Without the aid of reference, define in writing the two types

of cryptographic vectors utilized in the KG-175 TACLANE per TACLANE-
Micro Inline Network Encryptor Interface and Operator’s Guide (0602-
PLAN-1103mr).
2
INTRODUCTION
Encryption has long been used by militaries and governments to

enable secure communication. Encryption can be used to protect data "at
rest,” such as files on computers and storage devices (e.g. USB flash
drives) or to protect data in transit, for example data being transferred
via networks (e.g. the Internet, e-commerce), cell phones, and wireless
media. Encrypting data in transit and at rest helps to secure it from
unauthorized access.
INTRODUCTION TO NETWORK ENCRYPTION
Per Newton’s Telecom Dictionary, encryption is the transformation

of data into a form unreadable by anyone without a secret decryption
key. Its purpose is to ensure privacy by keeping the information or
traffic hidden from anyone for whom it is not intended. In short, it is
a means of protecting information or traffic from anyone other than the
intended recipient.
When we refer to traffic, we are referring to the amount of
activity during a given period of time over a circuit. The
RED/BLACK isolation concept pertains to the separation of electrical
and electronic circuits, components, equipment, and systems that
handle unencrypted (RED) information in electrical signals from those
that handle encrypted (BLACK) information in the same form.
The first type of traffic we will discuss is RED traffic. The RED
designation is applied to telecommunications and automated information
systems, plus associated areas, circuits, components, and equipment.
When classified, unencrypted signals are being processed and require
protection during electrical transmission. RED signals are any
telecommunications or automated information system signals that would
divulge classified information if recovered and analyzed due to a lack
of encryption. RED signals may be plain text, key, sub- key, initial
fill, control, or traffic flow related information. This is basically
unprotected, classified information which requires some action to be
taken to protect it. Simply put, RED traffic requires further encryption
prior to transmission.
Conversely, BLACK traffic is traffic which does not require any
further action in order to protect the transmitted information because
it either does not require encryption or because it has already been
encrypted. BLACK traffic is any signal (including control or enciphered
signals) that would not divulge national security information if
recovered and analyzed. In short, BLACK traffic requires no further
encryption prior to transmission.
3
6th Marine Regiment
Camp Lejeune, NC
Grid Coordinates
RED RED RED KG-175 BLACK

SIPRNET SIPRNET
SIPRNET Connectivity
The figure above is similar to what you have seen thus far in the
course. Please note that traffic on the subscriber side of the encryption
device at each node is referred to as RED traffic. Traffic that has been
encrypted and requires no further action for transmission is referred
to as BLACK traffic.
Now that we see the different classifications of traffic within a
simple equipment string, how is the information/traffic actually
protected? The answer to that question is explained in how the USMC uses
both Communications Security (COMSEC) and Transmission Security
(TRANSEC) in protecting information.
ENCRYPTION METHODS
Communications Security (COMSEC) and Transmission Security

(TRANSEC) devices are used to protect both classified and unclassified
traffic passed via tactical switched systems within networks. Their use
applies to voice, data, and video information processing systems as
well as to the associated communications interfacing equipment using
varied transmission media. The services involved include those of the
Defense Information Systems Network (DISN) common-user transitions
consisting of the Defense Switched Network (DSN), the Unclassified but
Sensitive Internet Protocol Router Network (NIPRNET), and the Secret
Internet Protocol Router Network (SIPRNET). Also involved are the
services offered by other systems and networks including, but not limited
to, those of the Joint Worldwide Intelligence Communications System
(JWICS), the Defense Red Switch Network (DRSN), the Defense Message
System (DMS), and video teleconferencing (VTC) systems. They also include
special-purpose and point-to-point circuits.
With the application of any protection to switched-system circuits,
special considerations must also be given to the type of transmission
media used in the connection between two or more nodes. A RF-type of
medium such as satellite or line-of-sight (LOS) radio requires a stricter
application of COMSEC and/or TRANSEC measures than metallic media like
coaxial, twisted pair cable, or fiber-optic cable transmission systems.
The transmission media becomes the critical and primary consideration
when deciding on the application of COMSEC and TRANSEC devices. Also to
be considered, as far as transmission is concerned, is the circuit type;
i.e., whether it is a DOD-owned circuit, leased line, or commercial line
(domestic or foreign).
4
A COMSEC device provides traffic security which is the protection
(encryption/decryption) of classified or unclassified operational
information. Line encryption is another term that is synonymous with
COMSEC.
A TRANSEC device provides for the protection of transmissions from
interception and exploitation by means other than crypto analysis and
involves a number of measures to protect transmissions. They include
such deterrent action as the application of low probability of intercept
(LPI) techniques, frequency hopping, spread-spectrum transmission, the
use of highly directional antennae, etc. Otherwise referred to as a Trunk
Encryption Device (TED), TRANSEC devices provide outgoing transmission
traffic-flow security or bulk encryption/decryption.
TRANSEC
COMSEC
Typical COMSEC and TRANSEC Connectivity
This application is normally associated with a multiplexed

interface or aggregate data prior to transmission or subsequent further
multiplexing. A TRANSEC device can receive clocking from either a RED
or BLACK source. The intent of a TED that provides traffic flow security
is to randomize data flow so that there is no apparent change of activity
on the circuit; i.e., it cannot be determined when a circuit is in use
or not, as well as provide protection for sensitive but unclassified
circuits.
In legacy networking, the Multiplexor was the aggregate in the

network combining multiple data streams or networks into one. Prior to
Black Core routing or convergence routing as we will learn later in
Charlie annex. Prior to Everything-Over-Internet-Protocol (EOIP) enabled
devices, multiplexing was accomplished using hardware multiplexing via
the TAC-300. Black core routing is becoming the Marine Corps established
standard by using a router to establish a logical Point-to-point
connection between two routers or “IPsec tunnel.” An IPsec tunnel or
tunneling allows secure traffic over untrusted network/medium – in our
case the multichannel radio. The black core router now has a simplified
routing configuration over the transit system.
Traditionally, the Marine Corps has run secure and unsecure

networks that are physically separate. The NIPRNET and SIPRNET never
touch each other; they are combined at the multiplexer and propagated
over the transmission path. The routers connect to encryption devices
and the multiplexer using serial interfaces and cables which are limited
to 8192 Kbps. Knowing that the vast majority of the Marine Corps’
transmission paths support data rates far greater than 8192
5
Kbps, how can we more effectively allocate bandwidth to further
enhance capability provided to the warfighter?
The Marine Corps has transitioned to IP-based multichannel radio

systems that receive a Fast Ethernet input and then modulate the IP-
based data to a radio waveform for transmission to the distant end
without the use of a multiplexer. Some of these IP radios, however, only
support static routing or unicast traffic. How can we incorporate these
radios into our dynamic WAN architecture if they only route traffic
statically? The answer lies in the understanding of a more advanced
data networking concept called Virtual Private Networks or tunneling.
Tunneling or, “port forwarding” is the transmission of data intended for
use only within a private, usually corporate network through a public
network in such a way that the routing nodes in the public network are
unaware that the transmission is part of a private network.
6
AN/MRC-142C Equipment String with a COMSEC device providing COMSEC or
line encryption and a TRANSEC device (Router) providing TRANSEC or
bulk encryption
Notice the placement of encryption devices in the figure above.

Observe the fact that a COMSEC device is placed on the SIPRNET circuit
providing COMSEC or line encryption. Also, take notice of the TRANSEC
device providing TRANSEC or bulk encryption for the aggregated services
just prior to transmission by the AN/GRC-245A (a multichannel radio).
U.S. MARINE CORPS ENCRYPTION DEVICES
KG-194/194A. The KG-194/KG-194A performs digital data encryption and

decryption in full-duplex synchronous operation employing identical key
generators for transmission and reception. It will pass traffic data
rates of 9.6 Kbps to 13 Mbps and is capable of both line and bulk
encryption.
The KG-194 is the grey version and the KG-194A is the olive drab,
ruggedized version. The primary difference between the KG-194 and the
KG-194A is that the KG-194 is designed specifically for rack mounting,
while the KG-194A can be used in a free-standing or stackable
configuration or have wings added for rack mounting.
Depending on the transmission system, you will most likely never
exceed the data rate capability, however, with other devices, it is
important to note that your maximum data rate will most likely be
7
limited by one item or another within the equipment string. Typically,
the KG-194/194A is found in the unit Technical Control (TECHCON) Facility
or at antenna hill.
KG-194 KG-194A
KIV-19/KIV-19A. The KIV-19/19A performs digital data encryption and

decryption, employing identical key generators for transmission and
reception and supports data transfer rates from 9.6 Kbps up to 13 Mbps.
The KIV-19 TED is functionally equivalent to the KG-194 and the KG-194A
with the benefit of being approximately 75% lighter and 80% smaller. The
KIV-19 is an encryption device that is capable of both bulk and line
encryption and is usually found within a Technical Control Facility
(TCF).
KIV-19
KIV-7. The KIV-7 is a compact COMSEC device designed to protect digital

data communications links and comes with a removable cryptographic
ignition key (CIK) that prevents unauthorized access and protects the
internally stored keys. The KIV-7 encrypts and decrypts digital data on
dedicated links between communications devices (i.e. it is used only
for line encryption) and comes in three models: KIV-7, KIV-7 HS, KIV-7
HSA/B.
KIV-7 maximum data rate = 512 Kbps

KIV-7HS maximum data rate = 1544 Kbps
KIV-7HSA/B maximum data rate = 2048 Kbps
All three models are interoperable with the KIV-7M (discussed in

the next paragraph) and accept synchronous or asynchronous, serial, plain
text data from a variety of terminal devices, encrypt the data, and
produce a serial cipher text output. The process is reversed on the
receive side. You will usually find the KIV-7 in the Transition Switch
Module (TSM) equipment, Data Distribution System (DDS-R),
8
Digital Technical Control Facility (DTC), or in your unit’s TECHCON
Facility.
KIV-7
KIV-7M. The KIV-7M can be used as a bulk or line encryption device. It

is interoperable with the KIV-7/7HS/HSA/HSB which are all line encryption
devices, and the KIV-19/19A. It has a maximum data rate of up to 50 Mbps
depending on strap settings and also has serial cable interfaces for our
packet and circuit switch DTE. The KIV-7M is found in the TSM, DTC, and
TECHCON Facility.
KIV-7M
KG-175 TACLANE
The TACLANE (KG-175) is short for Tactical FASTLANE and was

developed to provide network communications security on Internet
Protocol (IP) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) networks for the
individual user or for enclaves of users at the same security level. The
KG-175 is a low-cost, Type 1 (based on the Advanced Encryption Standard),
key-agile, in-line network encryptor for deployment in Department of
Defense (DOD) tactical and strategic networks in classified applications
up to TOP SECRET. KG-175s meet the needs of users who must communicate
securely over legacy networks such as the Secure Internet Protocol Router
Network (SIPRNET) via public and/or private network infrastructures. The
most current revision is the KG- 175D TACLANE-Micro which is capable of
aggregate data rates up to 200 Mbps and simultaneous connectivity to up
to 512 fully meshed nodes. Much like other network encryptors in the
Marine Corps inventory, the TACLANE uses a cryptographic ignition key
(CIK) that renders the device unusable and UNCLASSIFIED when removed.
9
KG-175E KG-175D Micro
In addition to its role as a network encryptor, the TACLANE works

at Layer 3 as a router. It utilizes a HAIPE IS dynamic routing standard
known as Secure Dynamic Discovery to support automated peer discovery.
HIGH ASSURANCE INTERNET PROTOCOL ENCRYPTOR (HAIPE)

INTEROPERABILITY SPECIFICATION (IS)
The Department of Defense’s communication infrastructure has become

more reliant upon networked communications systems. Legacy government-
owned and operated circuit switched communication channels are being
replaced with packet switched infrastructures. National Security Systems
(NSS) users are also starting to leverage commercial and foreign public
Internet Protocol (IP) infrastructures. These networks will provide a
converged transport infrastructure for data applications, as well as
real-time services. Communication channels that were often implemented
to support a single application over a link now rely on a shared
infrastructure that supports multiple applications operating over a mesh
network. As this transition occurs, legacy link encryptors must be
incrementally replaced with network encryption products. The
interoperability of network-layer encryption devices is vital to
enabling net-centric capabilities, while maintaining end-to-end
protection of NSS traffic. The High Assurance Internet Protocol Encryptor
(HAIPE) Interoperability Specification (IS) defines requirements for a
modular suite of traffic protection, networking, and management features
that provide secure interoperability between users, content
repositories, and net-centric enterprise services in an IPv4/IPv6
network.
CRYPTOGRAPHY 101
10
In traditional cryptography, the sender and receiver of a message
know and use the same secret key; the sender uses the secret key to
encrypt the message, and the receiver uses the same secret key to decrypt
the message. This method is known as secret key or symmetric
cryptography. The main challenge is getting the sender and receiver to
agree on the secret key without anyone else finding out. If they are in
separate physical locations, they must trust a courier, a phone system,
or some other transmission medium to prevent the disclosure of the secret
key. Anyone who overhears or intercepts the key in transit can later
read, modify, and forge all messages encrypted or authenticated using
that key. The generation, transmission, and storage of a key is called
key management; all cryptosystems must deal with key management issues.
Because all keys in a secret-key cryptosystem must remain secret,
secret-key cryptography often has difficulty providing secure key
management, especially in open systems with a large number of users.
In order to solve the key management problem, Whitfield Diffie and
Martin Hellman introduced the concept of public-key cryptography in
1976. Public-key cryptosystems (asymmetric cryptography) have two
primary uses, encryption and digital signatures. In their system, each
person gets a pair of keys, one called the public key and the other
called the private key. The public key is published, while the private
key is kept secret. The need for the sender and receiver to share secret
information is eliminated; all communications involve only public keys,
and no private key is ever transmitted or shared. In this system, it
is no longer necessary to trust the security of some means of
communications. The only requirement is that public keys be associated
with their users in a trusted (authenticated) manner (for instance, in
a trusted directory). Anyone can send a confidential message by just
using public information, but the message can only be decrypted with a
private key, which is in the sole possession of the intended recipient.
Furthermore, public-key cryptography can be used not only for privacy
(encryption), but also for authentication (digital signatures) and other
various techniques.
In a public-key cryptosystem, the private key is linked
mathematically to the public key. Therefore, it is always possible to
discern the private key from the public key. Typically, the defense
against this is to make the problem of deriving the private key from the
public key as difficult as possible. For instance, some public- key
cryptosystems are designed such that deriving the private key from the
public key requires the attacker to factor a large number, preferably
one computationally infeasible to perform the derivation.
a. Encryption: When Alice wishes to send a secret message to Bob,

she looks up Bob’s public key in a directory, uses it to encrypt the
message and sends it off. Bob then uses his private key to decrypt the
message and read it. No one listening in can decrypt the message. Anyone
can send an encrypted message to Bob, but only Bob can read it (because
only Bob knows his private key).
b. Digital Signatures: To sign a message, Alice does a computation

involving both her private key and the message itself.
11
The output is called a digital signature and is attached to the message.
To verify the signature, Bob does a computation involving the message,
the purported signature, and Alice’s public key. If the result is correct
according to a simple, prescribed mathematical relation, the signature
is verified to be genuine; otherwise, the signature is fraudulent, or
the message may have been altered.
HAIPE is based on IPSec with additional restrictions and

enhancements. One of these enhancements includes the ability to encrypt
multicast data using a pre-placed key. This requires loading the same
key on all HAIPE devices that will participate in the multicast session
in advance of data transmission. A HAIPE is typically a secure gateway
that allows two enclaves to exchange data over an un-trusted or lower
classification network.
KG-175 TACLANE CRYPTOGRAPHIC VECTOR SETS
The KG-175 TACLANE utilizes both symmetric and asymmetric

cryptography in the form of vector sets, or keying material (KEYMAT)
commonly referred to as “fills,” to secure networks. These vector sets
contain the cryptographic variables used to create the cipher to encrypt
classified or sensitive information. These vector sets are produced and
controlled by the National Security Agency (NSA). The loss and/or
interception of them could lead to a breach in confidentiality of
communications networks.
a. Pre-Placed Key (PPK): PPK is the vector set commonly utilized

in legacy Marine Corps encryptors such as:
(1) KIV-7/HS/HSA/HSB
(2) KG-194/A
(3) VINSON (RT-1523/KY-57)
(4) KG-175 TACLANE (Secure Dynamic Discovery)
PPKs require that the exact same vector set be utilized for both
encryption and decryption of the data. PPKs have a short period of use
with segments typically lasting up to a month.
The KG-175D TACLANE-Micro has the capacity to store up to 48 PPK
chains to be used for Secure Dynamic Discovery (SDD) with up to eleven
changeover PPKs in each PPK chain. PPKs are only utilized when utilizing
SDD in dynamic routing environments (DMVPN). Networks utilizing static
routes (AN/MRC-142C, WPPL, etc.) do not require the use of the PPK.
b. FIREFLY: FIREFLY vector sets utilize public-key cryptography

technology, or asymmetric keying, which eliminates the need for frequent
crypto changeovers and painstaking coordination of secret keys utilized
by PPKs. FIREFLY vectors are utilized in Marine Corps encryptors such
as:
(1) KG-175 TACLANE
12
(2) KIV-7M
(3) FORTEZZA
The use of FIREFLY vector sets enables any device using a FIREFLY
key to establish a cryptographic association with another automatically
provided the devices are configured to do so. This greatly reduces the
time required to establish large secure networks. Key partitions, key
classification, network configurations, device configurations, and bad
guy lists (list of black-listed or invalid keys) assist in eliminating
inherent risks.
Each FIREFLY vector set is individualized with a key material
identifier (KMID) that serves as a serial number for the vector set.
Each encryptor must use a unique vector set identified by a unique KMID.
FIREFLY vector sets have longer periods of use with segments
typically lasting six months to a year in duration.
When planning for a network with multiple types of circuits,

refer to the following four rules as guidelines:
1. All inter-nodal operational and military official government

information must be encrypted by channel or TRANSEC prior to RF
transmission (e.g., via satellite links, LOS radio, etc.) and be
provided information assurance.
2. DSN traffic is essentially unclassified or BLACK information

because the DSN is intended to be used for the transmission of only
unclassified or separately encrypted (e.g., STU-III) information. DSN
traffic thus requires a minimum of bulk encryption or a TRANSEC device
prior to inter-nodal RF transmission.
3. The NIPRNET likewise, because of its unclassified nature,

requires a minimum of bulk encryption or a TRANSEC device prior to RF
transmission.
4. SIPRNET traffic is classified or RED information because the

SIPRNET is intended to be used for the transmission of classified
information up to the SECRET level. It requires a COMSEC device along
with a TRANSEC device prior to RF transmission.
When implementing encryption devices for a tactical evolution, it

is extremely important to understand the planning considerations on the
front end. For most units, coordination with the Electronic Key
Management Systems (EKMS) Manager needs to begin no later than 30 days
prior to the training event when the cryptographic material will be
required. Ensure that Letters of Agreement with the supporting units
that you will provide cryptographic material to have been completed and
that you have submitted, in writing, to the EKMS Manager who the
authorized persons are that can draw cryptographic fills for your unit.
13
With all encryption devices, timing is extremely important, and
depending on the size of the network and the number of units
participating, it will be imperative to conduct a strapping exercise to
ensure that all configurations are correct and that those encryption
devices to be used for bulk (TRANSEC) or line (COMSEC) encryption have
been identified and labeled.
SUMMARY
With the growing dependence on network systems in America, and the

DoD specifically, we must find ways of keeping our data from being
intercepted, altered, or spoofed. Tunneling provides a way to bulk
encrypt our traffic, but we also need a way to line encrypt our Secret
information that we send (i.e. – the SIPRNet). In the end, the KG- 175D
provides this missing link in a compact package allowing us to securely
tunnel SIPR and NIPR traffic over a link without multiplexors.
REFERENCES

– Joint Communications Security
4. Telecommunications Essentials, 2nd Edition
5. TM 2000-152D
6. TACLANE-Micro (KG-175D) Datasheet
7. CNSS Policy No. 19, National Policy Governing the Use of High
Assurance Internet Protocol Encryptor (HAIPE) Products
8. RSA Laboratories Standards Initiatives: Public-Key Cryptography
Standards (PKCS) #6
9. TACLANE-Micro Inline Network Encryptor Interface and Operator’s
Guide
14
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
SIGNAL CONVERSION
ECC E04
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED

a signal converter per Newton's Telecom Dictionary, 24th Edition
(0602-PLAN-1103cg).

data rate of the CV-HTU-16M per the CV-HTU-16M NRZ/CDI/Fiber Protocol
Converter User Guide (0602-PLAN-1103ci).

data rate of the CV-FOM-D per the CV-FOM-D NRZ/CDI/Fiber Protocol
Converter User Guide (0602-PLAN-1103ch).
2
INTRODUCTION
Signal converters are electronic devices that change a data signal

into a form suitable for a transmission medium or reverse. There are
several types of signal converters: analog-to-digital converters (ADCs)
that sample analog signals and convert them to a series of digital values
and by contrast, digital-to-analog converters (DACs) that convert
digital numbers into corresponding voltage or current levels. In recent
years, there has also been the addition of fiber optic signal converters
that have been incorporated into the Marine Corps telecommunications
architecture. As a network planner you must understand signal
conversion and how signals flow through equipment in the network in order
to effectively plan networks that transmit voice, video, and data
networking signals around the Area of Operations (AO) to support the
Commander in their endeavors to command and control their forces.
DIGITAL BIT STREAM REVIEW
A bit is the smallest unit of information storage of a digital

signal that consists of discrete pulses of electricity or light that
represent the information to be processed. In short, a bit is a binary
digit that takes a logical value of either “1” or “0.”
Non-Return to Zero (NRZ), Conditioned DiPhase (CDI), and Fiber
Optic signals are the three most popular cable link protocols in the
tactical communications world today. NRZ is the prevalent signaling
format among data routers, hubs, switches, video cameras, and modems.
Differential Manchester, or more commonly known as Condition Diphase
(CDI), is a specialized signaling format that permits higher rate data
connections to be wire-based over longer distances than NRZ. Fiber Optic
signaling permits high-speed data connections and is a cable- based
signaling format that uses pulses of light instead of electricity to
represent binary 1’s and 0’s.
NRZ signaling is used by communications and information systems
equipment like digital radios and computers in order to pass data
internally. This is because the NRZ code requires only half the bandwidth
required by CDI due to the “clocking” not being imbedded within the
actual signal (it is a separate signal). NRZ may still be used externally
over short distances depending on how your site is setup. The main
restraint with NRZ signaling is that the signal will attenuate at
distances typically greater than 100 meters.
CDI signaling is primarily used with CX-11230. It offers a more
reliable signal due to how it detects the transitions that indicate a
binary number of 1 or 0 and because of this the signal is capable of
traveling distances up to 4 kilometers (dependant on equipment string,
transmit frequency, etc.) before degrading from attenuation vice the
100 meters that NRZ signaling offers.
Optical fiber signals are generally chosen for networks requiring
higher bandwidth or networks that span longer distances than electrical
signals can accommodate. Depending on the type of light source being
used (Laser Emitting Diodes or Light Emitting Diodes),
3
the distances can vary. Commercial multi-mode fiber uses light emitting
diodes and has a range of up to 10 kilometers. Commercial single-mode
fiber uses Laser Emitting Diodes and has a range up to several hundred
kilometers (with appropriate equipment string). For the USMC, the
primary type of cable used is the CX-13295 Tactical Fiber Optic Cable.
CX-13295 is a multimode fiber and has a max distance of 8 kilometers
without the use of a repeater.
PURPOSE OF SIGNAL CONVERTERS
Encryption Devices (e.g. KIV-7M, KIV-19 and KG-194A) and other

equipment like data routers require balanced, synchronous NRZ signals to
operate. In short, they receive, transmit, and internally process NRZ
signals that are all normally co-located within a unit’s Technical
Control (TECHCON) Facility. Since digital transmission systems (e.g.
MRC-142Cs, SMART-Ts, TRC-170s, TSSRs, etc) are all normally co-located
at a remote site away from TECHCON where bulk encryption of the
multiplexed aggregate occurs, the NRZ signal from the aggregate, at some
point, must be changed or converted to a CDI or optical signal so it can
travel to the transmission system without experiencing attenuation.
In the following figure, the signal conversion occurs within the
Technical Control Facility (TCF). The TAC-300 multiplexer produces a
multiplexed aggregate that is NRZ. This is necessary because the KIV-
7M, which in this scenario is being used as a TRANSEC device, can only
accept an NRZ signal. After the signal leaves the KIV-7M TRANSEC device,
it travels to a signal converter (CV-FOM-D) where it is changed from an
NRZ signal into a fiber optic signal. At this point, the signal leaves
the TECHCON Facility and travels via fiber optic cable to antenna hill
where it enters another signal converter (CV- HTU-16M) and is changed
from a fiber optic signal back into a NRZ signal. The signal then goes
on to the AN/MRC-142C transmission system where the NRZ signal is
modulated onto an RF carrier wave and transmitted over the airwaves.
Subscriber Area Technical Control Facility Antenna Hill
AN/GRC-
NR CV-HTU-16M
CV-FOM-D
KIV-7
AN/MRC-142C Signal Conversion
4
TYPES OF SIGNAL CONVERTERS
Common signal converters in use within the USMC are as follows:
1. CV-2048
2. CV-2048E
3. CV-2048M
4. CV-8448 Models
5. CV-FOM-D
6. CV-HTU-16M
For the purposes of this discussion we will primarily focus on the

CV-2048, CV-8448-CX/F/D, CV-FOM-D, and CV-HTU-16M.
CV-2048. This is the first model of the converter and is still in use
today although not as widely as before. The CV-2048 bridges the NRZ/CDI
cable formats together to allow popular NRZ devices to be positioned on
the battlefield wherever they need to be and still access the
communications network.
CV-2048
The CV-2048 is an external commercial device that performs NRZ-

to-CDI and CDI-to-NRZ conversion. The NRZ interface of the unit accepts
and generates RS-422 (balanced) signals using a DB-25 connector. The
maximum data rate capacity corresponds with the nomenclature e.g. CV-
2048 series equals 2048 kbps.
The rear panel contains all the input/output connections. These
can be DB-25, British Naval Connector (BNC), TNC, Push-pin, UG-1837, or
Molex connectors, depending on user configuration.
CV-2048 Rear Panel
5
Applicable data rates for the CV-2048 are as follows:
CV-2048 Data Rates

16k 256k 1024k
32k 288k 1152k
56k 320k 1344k
72k 384k 1536k
96k 448k 1544k
112k 512k 1920k
128k 576k 2048k
144k 640k
192k 768k
224k 960k
CV-8448. The CV-8448 is an upgrade to the CV-2048. The CV-8448 series

signal converters convert CDI signals to NRZ signals and vice versa. The
CV-8448 is available in three models: CV-8448F (standalone model),
CV-8448CX (standalone model), and CV-8448D (dual channel). In addition,
an optional TFOCA-II adapter kit is available for the CV-8448F. The CV-
8448F features an 8448 Kbps optical ST CDI interface in addition to a
4608 Kbps UG-1837/G coax copper interface (unbalanced). The CV-8448CX
(copper-only model) is the “copper interface only” model with a 4608
Kbps UG-1837/G coax copper interface (unbalanced). All CV-8448 models
(Software Version 3.0 and greater) are backward compatible with the CV-
2048.
CV-8448 Standalone NRZ to CDI Converter
The CV-8448-D is a dual module CDI/NRZ converter in a common compact

1U high rack mountable chassis. The CV-8448-D can be paired with another
CV-8448-D via an expansion port to form a four channel (4-PACK)
configuration that may be controlled from a single terminal interface.
CV-8448-D Front Panel
6
Each CV-8448-D module is equipped with:
1. 8448 Kbps ST Optical Fiber Interface
2. 2048 Kbps Balanced CDI electrical connector (DB-9)
3. 4608 Kbps Unbalanced CDI electrical connectors (sub-triax)
4. External clock connector (BNC)
5. NRZ electrical connector (DB-25)
CV-8448-D Rear Panel
The CV-8448-D has a max data rate of up to 8448 Kbps. See chart
below for detailed explanation of specific interface capabilities:
CV-8448 data rates based on interface
7
CV-HTU-16M. The CV-HTU-16M is an upgrade of the CV-8448-D. An SL-3
component of the AN/MRC-142C transmission system, it has a max data rate
of 16,384 Kbps. See chart below:
CV-HTU-16M
64 2112 4160 6208 8256 10304 12352 14400
128 2176 4224 6272 8320 10368 12416 14464
192 2240 4288 6336 8384 10432 12480 14528
256 2304 4352 6400 8448 10496 12544 14592
320 2368 4416 6464 8512 10560 12608 14656
384 2432 4480 6528 8576 10624 12672 14720
448 2496 4544 6592 8640 10688 12736 14784
512 2560 4608 6656 8704 10752 12800 14848
576 2624 4672 6720 8768 10816 12864 14912
640 2688 4736 6784 8832 10880 12928 14976
704 2752 4800 6848 8896 10944 12992 15040
768 2816 4864 6912 8960 11008 13056 15104
832 2880 4928 6976 9024 11072 13120 15168
896 2944 4992 7040 9088 11136 13184 15232
960 3008 5056 7104 9152 11200 13248 15296
1024 3072 5120 7168 9216 11264 13312 15360
1088 3136 5184 7232 9280 11328 13376 15424
1152 3200 5248 7296 9344 11392 13440 15488
1216 3264 5312 7360 9408 11456 13504 15552
1280 3328 5376 7424 9472 11520 13568 15616
1344 3392 5440 7488 9536 11584 13632 15680
1408 3456 5504 7552 9600 11648 13696 15744
1472 3520 5568 7616 9664 11712 13760 15808
1536 3584 5632 7680 9728 11776 13824 15872
1600 3648 5696 7744 9792 11840 13888 15936
1664 3712 5760 7808 9856 11904 13952 16000
1728 3776 5824 7872 9920 11968 14016 16064
1792 3840 5888 7936 9984 12032 14080 16128
1856 3904 5952 8000 10048 12096 14144 16192
1920 3968 6016 8064 10112 12160 14208 16256
1984 4032 6080 8128 10176 12224 14272 16320
2048 4096 6144 8192 10240 12288 14336 16384
The CV-HTU-16M contains the following interfaces (Note the

addition of the TFOCA interface not found on previous converters):
CV-HTU-16M Interfaces
8
CV-FOM-D. This converter is an upgraded CV-8448-D and is a rack-
mountable version of the CV-HTU-16M. The CV-FOM-D is capable of data
rates up to 16,384 Kbps and is a dual mode CDI/NRZ/Optical converter in
a common compact rack-mountable chassis. It is an SL-3 component of
the Deployed Integrated Transport Suite (DITS) and the AN/MRC-142C
transmission system.
CV-FOM-D
The CV-FOM-D is also equipped with the following:
1. Up to 16,384 Kbps (user data rate) in the FOM configuration

(user data rate) and up to 8,448 Kbps in the CV configuration.
2. Optical fiber Interface compatible with multimode fiber (62.5

μm diameter), tactical fiber (50 μm diameter), or single-mode fiber (9
μm diameter), with external ST connectors on the chassis.
3. Up to 2048 Kbps Balanced CDI electrical interface (external

DB9 connector on the chassis).
4. Up to 4608 Kbps Unbalanced CDI electrical connectors (external

subtriax connectors on the chassis).
5. External Clock Input connector (external BNC connector on the

chassis).
6. NRZ EIA-530/RS-422 electrical interface (external DB25

mechanical connector on the chassis).
The CV-FOM-D has the same data rates as the CV-HTU-16M.
9
TIMING
Timing ensures that all bits are transmitted and received at the
appropriate rate and interval thus preventing bit errors and frame slips
from occurring. Remember from the Network Timing and Synchronization
class that in the USMC we use GPS timing to distribute stratum-1 level
clocking into the equipment string. Because of this, each piece of
equipment must be “told” where to look for its own timing. When the
equipment is properly configured, its own, internal oscillator (clock)
will be slaved to the timing being distributed in the network, and thus
be of stratum-1 accuracy. An explanation of the timing settings for each
signal converter is described below:
a. NRZ. When the CV selects NRZ Clocking, it monitors and tracks

“Tx Clk In” and all required timing is developed from this source.
b. CDI. When the CV selects CDI Clocking, it monitors and tracks

the “CDI RX CLK” which is part of the incoming signal on the receive
wire pair from the CDI source (e.g. transmission system). The NRZ
clocks are developed from this source either over the radio airwaves
or directly from the radio system itself.
c. FIBER. (Only CV-HTU-16M and CV-FOM-D). The converter uses

the recovered timing signal from the fiber interface to generate the
system timing clock reference.
d. EXT-1M or EXT-5M. When External Clocking is selected, the CV

monitors and tracks an External Clock Source (“Ext Clk In”). CV
distributes timing which is provided by a GPS Clock connected to it
(External Timing). This is the best configuration because GPS’s
provide the most reliable timing.
e. INT. When Internal Timing is selected the CV develops NRZ,

CDI, and optical (depending on CV’s capabilities) clocking from the
internal oscillators (“Tx Clk Out”). Rarely used because CV’s are not
great timing sources (~ 1 x 10-4).
10
SUMMARY
Throughout this lesson, the CV-2048, CV-8448 models, CV-HTU-16M,

and the CV-FOM-D have been discussed. As technological advances in
telecommunications continue, signal converters will be developed to
support higher data rates and interface types, effectively maintaining
system interoperability. Fiber optic cables are now a widely accepted
medium (industry standard) for improving data transmission reliability,
increasing distance, and enabling the support of new satellite and
microwave systems. Higher transmission rates permit networks to
adequately address new video applications and the rising volume of
electronic messaging. Given the many types of signaling that are used,
it will be critical to have signal converters that are able to meet the
demands of the differing types of telecommunications networks. It will
be your job as the network planner to accurately plan for and emplace
these signal converters within your own equipment string in order to
ensure information is able to be passed, intact, between users.
REFERENCES

2. CJCSM 6231 Series, Manual for Employing Joint Tactical
Communications
Glossary 2011
9. DNE Technologies Converter Technical Manuals
10. TM 11-6020-200-10, Fiber Optic Cable Assemblies CX-13295/G
11. TM 11-5995-208-24&P-1, Cable Assembly CX-11230A/G
12. TM 11375A-OR, CV-FOM-D NRZ/CDI/Fiber Protocol Converter
13. TM 11375A-OR/1, CV-HTU-16M NRZ/CDI/Fiber Protocol Converter
14. TM 09006A-10/1, Converter Set, Fiber Optic AN/GSC-54
11
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
AN/MRC-142C DIGITAL WIDEBAND TRANSMISSION SYSTEM (DWTS)
ECC E05
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED

planning range of the AN/MRC-142C per TM 11375A-ID (Operation and
Maintenance Manual for Radio Terminal Set, AN/MRC-142C) (0602-PLAN-
1103cr).
2. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the

frequency ranges of the bands in which the AN/MRC-142C operates per TM
11375A-ID (Operation and Maintenance Manual for Radio Terminal Set,
AN/MRC-142C) (0602-PLAN-1103cs).
3. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the minimum

allowable transmit/receive frequency separation given an operational
frequency band for the AN/MRC-142C per TM 11375A-ID (Operation and
1103ct).

encrypted data rate of the AN/MRC-142C per TM 11375A-ID (Operation and
1103cv).
5. Without the aid of reference, given a MRC-142C antenna,

identify in writing the frequency band in which it operates per TM
11375A-ID (Operation and Maintenance Manual for Radio Terminal Set,
AN/MRC-142C) (0602-PLAN-1103cw).
6. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the four

(4) radio modes of the AN/MRC-142C per TM 11375A-ID (Operation and
1103cy).
7. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing three (3)

basic operational configurations of the AN/MRC-142C per TM 11375A-ID
(Operation and Maintenance Manual for Radio Terminal Set, AN/MRC-142C)
(0602-PLAN-1103cz).

appropriate multichannel radio symbol for the AN/MRC-142C in
accordance with MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-
1103ke).
(b) PERFORMANCE-BASED
1. Given a command's mission, approved course of action, task

organization, table of equipment, higher headquarters Annex K plan for
the employment of a TEAMS during a field exercise within a timeline
provided by the commander that satisfies the commanders communications
system requirements for command and control, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF
2
Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1103mr).

organization, table of equipment, higher headquarters Annex K
supervise the employment of a TEAMS during a field exercise within a
timeline provided by the commander that satisfies the commanders
communications system requirements for command and control per MCWP 3-
40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1103ms).
3. Given a scenario, command's mission, approved course of

action, task organization, table of equipment, and Systems Planning
Engineering and Evaluation Device (SPEED) with appropriate map data,
analyze Ultra High Frequency (UHF) Line-of-Sight (LOS) multichannel
radio nets using the Point-to-Point analysis tool within SPEED, within
a timeline provided by the commander in order to satisfy the
commander's communications system requirements for command and
control, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-
1103da).
3
INTRODUCTION
The modern day battlefield demands a wireless radio system that is

capable of extending voice and data services to enable command and
control and will not hinder operational tempo. The AN/MRC-142C is a
transmission system that can accomplish this and extend connectivity
across the battlefield.
AN/MRC-142C SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
HMMWV-mounted, the AN/MRC-142C provides a medium range transmission

path using Ultra High Frequency (UHF) Critical LOS for Digital
Transmission Groups (DTGs) between AN/MRC-142Cs. The AN/MRC- 142C
offers:
1. High Capacity Line-Of-Sight (HCLOS) transmission platform via

the GRC-245A UHF Transceiver.
2. Maximum range of 35 miles over level terrain.
3. (3) Configurations: single link, dual link, and through

repeater.
4. Capable of transmitting/receiving up to (2) separate links

with the dual radio terminals (RT).
5. Operates in (2) frequency bands.
6. Interfaces with components of the Transport Switch Module

(TSM), the Data Distribution System-Replacement (DDS-R), various
multiplexers, and encryption devices.
7. Various link performance readings and alerts.
8. Various loopbacks for testing of the systems components.
4
Note the example equipment string below, it should look familiar:
VIB SLICE
3302
OMNI
TAC-300
AN/GRC-
KIV-7M
245A
CV-HTU-16M
CV-FOM-D
KIV-7
AN/MRC-142C Equipment String
The AN/MRC-142C operates in two bands:
1. Band I
a. Frequency range = 225 to 400 MHz
b. Power Output = 2.14 watts – 4.37 watts
c. Minimum frequency separation 25 MHz (between TXMT and RCV)
2. Band III+
a. Frequency range = 1350 to 2690 MHz
b. Power Output = 1.05 – 1.66 watts
c. Minimum frequency separation 50 MHz (between TXMT and RCV)
Note: Frequency Step Size is a minimum of 125 KHz for both bands.
Note: In the figure below, there is given an example of (2) AN/MRC-

142Cs with (1) established link or channel.
LOCAL SITE TXMT REMOTE SITE

RCV
RCV TXMT
5
In the figure below, you will find an example of (1) AN/MRC-142C
channel that contains Band III+ frequencies. Remember that there must be
a frequency separation of no less than 50 MHz in Band III+. As you can
see, each link has a TXMT and RCV pair. The TXMT frequency for the
local AN/MRC-142C is 1350 MHz and the RCV frequency is 1400 MHz. This is
important to note. In order to establish an AN/MRC-142C channel, you do
not require four frequencies— only two.
LOCAL SITE REMOTE SITE
[ 1350 MHz = TXMT 1350 MHz =RCV ]

Frequency separation= 50 MHz
[ 1400 MHz = RCV 1400 MHz = TXMT]
The maximum transmitted data rate of the AN/MRC-142C is broken down

into two categories:
a. Maximum unencrypted data rate is 16,384 kbps.
b. Maximum encrypted data rate is 14,336 kbps.
Overhead bits for the data service channel (16 Kbps), Digital
Engineer Orderwire (DEOW) 16 Kbps, and framing data bits are also
transmitted along with user information.
The applicable user data rates are as follows:
AN/MRC-142C
Data Rates (Kbps)
256 512 768
1024 1536 1544
2028 4096 8192
12288 13504 14336
16384
Note: These will also be the applicable data rates for the TAC-300 when
used with the AN/MRC-142C.
Bit Error Rate. There are many factors that can cause a loss of the
“quality” of the signal. When this happens the bits cannot be understood
correctly and interference or noise will introduce errors into the signal
(bit error/frame slips). Any bits that are received, but not understood,
are called bad bits. The more bad bits, the lower the quality of the
digital signal. The quality of the signal is expressed as the bit error
rate (BER). Be aware that the BER fluctuates with transmissions
depending on the medium through which
6
the transmissions travel (think about how a sandstorm would affect the
quality of a signal).
The BER is expressed using exponential notation, with the lower
exponent (they are negative numbers) having a better digital signal (10-
6
is a better signal than 10-1). Refer to table below:
Bit Error Rate Number of Bad Bits

10-1 1:10
10-2 1:100
10-3 1:1,000
10-4 1:10,000
10-5 1:100,000
10-6 1:1,000,000
Take 10-4 for instance. This means that for every 10,000 bits
received, only one would be bad. When communicating at much higher data
rates more bits are lost proportionally. This is why higher data rates
tend to be more sensitive and require a lower BER reading.
Most multichannel radio systems will not pass digital information
if the BER is lower than 10-4. BER requirements for voice and data
transmissions are as follows:
1. Voice transmissions (e.g. voice orderwire) = BER of 10-4
2. Data transmissions = BER of 10-6
The Received Signal Level (RSL) is the sum of the transmitter

power, transmitter antenna gain, and receiver antenna gain. If you find
that you are unable to attain the desired BER, most likely you will need
to improve your RSL by sweeping the antenna. For the AN/MRC-142C the
signal level or Receive Signal Level must be as follows:
1. Voice transmissions = -93 dBM
2. Data transmissions = -80 dBM
Key Takeaway: The RSL, expressed in -dBM, is the gain of the local side
antenna from the power output of the remote side antenna. Meaning it
is an expression of how well the antenna is able to “see” the distant
end’s antenna. The closer you can get to -50 dBM, the cleaner the link
will be to pass digital information (i.e. lower BER).
AN/MRC-142C SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1. GRC-245A: The AN/GRC-245A (V)6 High-Capacity Line-of-Sight

(HCLOS) UHF Transceiver consists of an amplifier Baseband Unit (BBU) and
a receiver/transmitter Radio Frequency Unit (RFU). It is configurable
for operation in Band I or Band III+ but the two bands cannot be mixed.
The radio itself also has a limited multiplexing
7
capability and can multiplex bulk traffic inputs from the Data 1 and
Data 2 ports. It also has different data interfaces for RS-422 and
balanced NRZ signals. The radio is capable of transmitting full duplex
digital traffic at a variety of user defined rates.
Baseband Unit
Radio Frequency
Unit
2. Baseband Unit: The Baseband Unit (BBU) is the AN/GRC-245A (V)6

amplifier. It also includes the Man-Machine Interface (MMI) for the radio
set. The user manages the radio set by entering frequencies,
provisioning data ports and data rates, and managing power levels
through BBU. The BBU provides interfaces for the following: RFU unit,
bulk traffic (two ports) and analog order wire handset.
The radio set requires users to provision the data ports and the
radio link rate. The data rates for the AN/GRC-245A must match the data
rate for all other AN/MRC-142C data transmission equipment.
Baseband Unit
3. Radio Frequency Unit: The Radio Frequency Unit (RFU)

functions as the radio terminal (RT). It is capable of transmitting in
the Band I (225-400 MHz) or Band III (1350-2690 MHz) frequency ranges.
It provides interfaces for the BBU and antenna. The RFU is capable of
being deployed either inside a shelter or outside at the base of the
antenna mast for increased flexibility in COC/Antenna Hill setup.
8
Radio Frequency Unit
Each AN/MRC-142C is equipped with one inter-unit cable reel. This
reel contains two 45 meter inter unit cables for a total distance of up
to 90 meters.
If you decide to leave the BBU in the TECHCON and place the RFU
at Antenna Hill, then the max distance between the TECHCON and Antenna
Hill cannot exceed 90 meters. However, if you plan to use both GRC- 245A
equipment sets, you are limited to 45 meters since you need one inter-
unit cable with each radio set.
4. Tactical Access Concentrator (TAC) 300: One is provided for

each AN/MRC-142C system. The TAC-300 provides the capability to combine
(multiplex) up to eight (8) circuits (subscriber inputs) into one
aggregate for transmission over a common path. To effectively employ a
TAC-300 the planner must know the following information:
a. Type & number of subscriber circuits;
b. Total data rate (payload + overhead) required for each

circuit; and
c. Total aggregate data rate.
9
TAC-300
5. Signal Converters: Within the AN/MRC-142C, the Converter High

Speed Tactical Unit (CV-HTU-16M) and Converter Fiber Optic Modem (CV-
FOM-D) convey traffic between the multiplexer and the radio set. The
AN/MRC-142C includes (4) compact signal converters: two (2) CV- HTU-16M
modules, and two (2) CV-FOM-D modules. These CV’s offer multiple signal
conversion capabilities that make the AN/MRC-142C flexible for a variety
of Marine Corps network requirements. They support CX-13295 (TFOCA), CX-
11230, and WF-16. Additionally they are Compatible with CV-2048 and CV-
8448 converter.
a. CV-HTU-16M: The CV-HTU-16M is equipped with an interface

for the following signal types: Balanced CDI, Unbalanced CDI, NRZ, and
Optical.
CV-HTU-16M
b. CV-FOM-D: The CV-FOM-D is equipped with an interface

for the following signal types: Balanced CDI, Unbalanced CDI, NRZ,
and Optical.
CV-FOM-D
10
Remember, the BBU requires an NRZ signal. If employing the AN/MRC-
142C where the BBU and the RFU are both located at Antenna Hill, there
will be a requirement to change the CDI or Optical signal back to an NRZ
signal.
PRI/CAS CDI/
NRZ NRZ Optical NRZ
CV-HTU-16M
CV-FOM-D
NRZ
KIV-7
6. Encryption Devices: The AN/MRC-142C has 3 encryption devices

that are SL-3 to it. They are:
a. KIV-7M: Two per vehicle, one for each RT. Provides TRANSEC
(Bulk Encryption) and COMSEC (Line Encryption). Each encrypts/decrypts
a single trunk or circuit.
KIV-7M
b. KY-57: One per vehicle. Provides 16 kbps loop

encryption for the DEOW.
KY-57
11
c. KYB-702: One per vehicle. Also known as the “KY-57
Buffer,” the KYB-702 synchronizes the timing between the KY-57 and
AN/GRC-245A (V)6 radio set. It supports 2 voice channels and features an
LED and buzzer alarm to indicate incoming calls.
KYB-702
7. Power Requirements: The SB-4327 Uninterruptible Power Supply

(UPS) is located in the passenger compartment behind or in front of the
two transit cases (depending on vehicle platform). Straps are used to
secure UPS to the HMMWV cargo restraint system. Two handles are provided
on UPS side panels to facilitate removal, replacement and carrying. UPS
weighs approximately 97 pounds, including the weight of the battery, and
is a two-man lift. UPS provides power to all electronic components of
AN/MRC-142C. It accepts AC or DC input and outputs AC power. AN/MRC-
142C operates on AC power only.
SB-4327/MRC-142C UPS
8. Antenna System: The AN/MRC-142C has two SL-3 antenna types

and two 50’ masts.
a. Band I Antenna: (nomenclature AS-3875) Lightweight, high

gain, high performance antenna. The antenna operates in the 225 – 400
MHz frequency range, and each AN/MRC-142C is equipped with one AS-3875
antenna.
AS-3875
12
b. Band III+ Antenna: (nomenclature AS-4515) Parabolic grid
reflector and long, periodic, wideband feed cone. It operates in the
1350 – 2690 MHz range. There are 2 per vehicle, one for each Radio
Transmitter (RT).
One antenna provides both transmit and receive functions for
communications across a channel (2 different frequencies). The antenna
focuses the radio energy into a directional, high gain pattern. The
Band III+ has a very narrow radiation pattern. In order to successfully
pass traffic, a network planner must know the exact azimuth to the
distant end as well as local site elevation. Recalculating azimuths
becomes extremely important when units displace throughout their area of
operations.
It should also be noted that the AS-4515 can be polarized either
horizontally or vertically. The near and distant end of a link must have
their feed cones polarized in the same manner in order for a link to be
established.
AS-4515
c. AB-1356 Mast: Two per vehicle, one for each AS-4515. The
mast is comprised of 10, telescoping 5’ tubular sections, and can be
erected to 15, 35 or 50 foot heights. It can be rotated 360 degrees
while erected. A compass and leveling bubble are SL-3 to the mast (don’t
consider the compass reliable).
Note: The AB-1356 masts are holdover from the previous AN/MRC-142A/B
terminals.
13
Transit Case Setup. All components previously covered, excluding the
antennas, are embarked in three transit cases.
TRANSIT CASE #3
TRANSIT CASE #2
TRANSIT CASE #1
Transit Case #1. This ruggedized transit case is comprised of the

following equipment: One (1) CV-HTU-16M; One (1) KY-57; One (1) KYB- 702
Buffer Assembly; and one (1) GRC-245 Baseband Unit (BBU).
CV-HTU-16M
BBU
KYB-702 BUFFER
14
following equipment: One (1) CV-HTU-16M and one (1) GRC-245 Baseband
Unit (BBU). It looks almost identical to Transit Case #1 except that the
KYB-702 is not present.

following equipment: One (1) VT-100 Terminal Emulator; two (2) KIV- 7M;
two (2) CV-FOM-D; one (1) Power Strip (Surge Protector); one (1) Tactical
ATM Concentrator (TAC) 300.
VT-100
KIV-7Ms
CV-FOM-Ds
POWER
STRIP
TAC-300
RADIO MODES
The AN/GRC-245A has four operational states. They are listed as

follows:
1. Standby: In this mode, the radio set does not transmit.

Note: Many AN/GRC-245A (V)6 tests require the system to be in STANDBY
mode.
2. Analog Engineering Order Wire (AEOW): AEOW is unencrypted

voice traffic. It should be used to establish a link. The analog
handset (RA-250) is used in this mode.
3. Digital Engineering Order Wire (DEOW): DEOW is encrypted

voice traffic. It uses the external KY-57 and H-250 handset.
4. Traffic: In this mode the radio transmits and receives a

multiplexed data stream to and from distant end AN/MRC-142C systems.
The DEOW function is available in this mode. Note: The radio must be
15
in TRAFFIC mode with no faults for data to transmit across the AN/MRC-
142C.
16
OPERATIONAL CONFIGURATIONS
There are 3 primary operational configurations for the AN/MRC-142C:
1. Single Link Terminal: Only one of the MRC-142C’s radio

terminals and AS-4515s/AB-1356s is used. A single communications link
is established between a local MRC-142C and a distant MRC-142C.
Single Link
2. Dual Link Terminal: Both of the MRC-142C’s radio terminals

and AS-4515s/AB-1356s are used. Two separate links are established by
the local MRC-142C, with different distant stations. Note: The dual
link terminal requires two TAC-300 multiplexers.
Dual Link
3. Through-Repeater: Used to extend range or overcome obstacles

between two, distant MRC-142C’s. A third MRC-142C between the two
points passing data is used to retransmit the signal. The repeating
system receives it from one end on one RT and repeats the signal to
the distant end on the other RT (and vice versa). Both RTs are used
to repeat one link.
17
Through-Repeater Mode
TACTICAL ELEVATED ANTENNA MAST SYSTEM (TEAMS)
The TEAMS is an independent telescopic mast system designed to

extend the operating range of Line of Sight (LOS) radio systems by
providing additional height to their antenna systems. The TEAMS, however,
is not an SL-3 component of any systems it is designed to support.
The TEAMS 34 meter (112’) telescopic mast provides multiple
mounting positions for several antennas, with steerable controls for two
directional antennas.
The TEAMS telescopic mast is capable of supporting a vertical top
load of 242 pounds at any height from fully retracted to full extension,
yielding a maximum communications distance of about 30 miles between
two TEAMS masts over flat, unobstructed terrain. When properly installed,
the mast may be safely deployed to full height at wind speeds up to 35
mph, and survives winds gusting to 80 mph. Operational wind speed with
any of the antenna configurations listed is 60 mph.
The TEAMS is capable of supporting multiple antenna configurations.
Some of these include:
18
AN/MRC-142C PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
1. Embarkation: The AN/MRC-142C system is installed on a M1123 or

M1165 HMMWV. Internal to the vehicle there is an aluminum shelf spanning
the wheel wells in the cargo areas. This provides storage for the Band
III+ antennas, torque arms, and feed horns. There is also a plywood
base replaced with aluminum skid plate, utilizing ratchet straps and
variable tie down points that provide for storage flexibility and transit
case configuration flexibility.
19
RF CABLE BAND III +
ANTENNAS
SOLAR
SHIELD
INTERUNIT
CABLE
RFU
AN/MRC-142C Physical Arrangement (Actual Representation)
2. Link Planning: As with any Critical Line of Sight (CLOS)

transmission system, conducting front-end planning is an important step.
Understanding the environment in which you operate and gathering
situational awareness is a critical step in successfully planning for a
CLOS transmission link. A few steps to follow in the planning process
are as follows:
a. Conduct a map reconnaissance (identify site locations

and conduct terrain appreciation);
b. Utilize SPEED profiles as a reference;
c. Conduct site surveys; and
d. Identify user requirements to include required overhead.

Remember the more data that you pass over the transmission link, the
more sensitive the link will be to Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
3. General: Other general planning considerations specific to the

AN/MRC-142C to be considered are as follows:
a. Grid of near and far terminals;
b. Contact Azimuth (antennas are directional);
c. Primary/alternate transmit and receive frequencies with

appropriate separation for Band I and Band III+ operation;
d. Antenna mounting configuration (AS-4515 or TEAMS);
e. Baseband assembly location;
f. Open area for TEAMS is utilized;
20
g. Timing source;
h. Signal converter configurations;
i. 1-4 hour setup time depending number and experience of

operators; and
j. Elevation of near and far terminals.
4. SPEED: The AN/MRC-142C does have a profile application

within SPEED and is a useful planning tool when engineering links.
5. Cut sheets: Cut sheets are a requirement. There must be a

cut sheet for every AN/MRC-142C that is online. This document greatly
aids the planner in documenting various planning factors and ensuring
the Marines have the required information to properly install the
equipment and establish the link. The cut sheet also aids the
operator when going through the troubleshooting process by having a
reference for all baseline configurations that can be used to verify
current software configurations. For each link that is setup the
operator must have a cut sheet depicting both the local side terminal
and remote side terminal information.
DOCUMENTATION
The AN/MRC-142C is depicted in multichannel radio diagrams via

the below symbol:
M(c) M(c) M(c)

MZL01
142 14336 Kbps 142
AN/MRC-142C AN/MRC-142C Link
M(c) M(c) M(c)

MZL01 MZL02
142 142 142
14336 Kbps 14336 Kbps
AN/MRC-142C Through-Repeater (Multichannel Diagram)
TAC-300 TAC-300
AN/MRC-142C Through-Repeater (Multiplexing Diagram)

21
REFERENCES

Communications
5. Organizational-Level Operation and Maintenance Manual – Tactical
Elevated Antenna Mast System (TEAMS)
6. TM 11375A-ID Radio Terminal Set, AN/MRC-142C
22
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
STRATEGIC SATELLITE ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW
ECC E06
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED
1. Without the aid of references, define in writing Department

of Defense Information Network, per Joint Publication 2-01 (Joint and
National Intelligence Support to Military Operations) (0602-PLAN-
1103mc).
2. Without the aid of references, define in writing uplink

frequency, per Air University-18 Space Primer, Second Edition (0602-
PLAN-1103md).
3. Without the aid of references, define in writing downlink

frequency, per Air University-18 Space Primer, Second Edition (0602-
PLAN-1103me).
4. Without the aid of references, define in writing transponder,

per Newton’s Telecom Dictionary, 24th Edition (0602-PLAN-1103mf).
5. Without the aid of references, define in writing Signal-to-

Noise Ratio, per Newton’s Telecom Dictionary, 24th Edition (0602-PLAN-
1103mg).
6. Without the aid of references, define in writing Eb/N0, per

ATIS Telecom Glossary 2012 (0602-PLAN-1103mh).
7. Without the aid of references, define in writing Frequency

Division Multiple Access, per Newton’s Telecom Dictionary, 24th
Edition (0602-PLAN-1103mi).
8. Without the aid of references, define in writing Time

Division Multiple Access, per Newton’s Telecom Dictionary, 24th
Edition (0602-PLAN-1103mj).
9. Without the aid of references, identify in writing the

purpose of the Standardized Tactical Entry Point (STEP)/Teleport, per
MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1103gm).

purpose of the Satellite Access Request, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF
Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1103kk).
2
purpose of the Gateway Access Request, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF
Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1103go).
3
INTRODUCTION
Military dependency on SATCOM for bandwidth grew 30 times within

the 13 years from Operation DESERT STORM to Operation IRAQI FREEDOM
(OIF). Furthermore, over 80 percent of SATCOM bandwidth used by the
military to conduct OIF and Operation ENDURING FREEDOM (OEF) has been
commercial SATCOM. United States Strategic Command (USSTRATCOM), who
forwards bandwidth requirements to the Defense Information Systems
Agency (DISA), determines commercial SATCOM requirements. As the
Department of Defense (DOD) designated contracting authority, DISA
obtains commercial services via an existing contract vehicle or
generates a new contract as necessary.
Military SATCOM (MILSATCOM) provides minimum essential warfighting
connectivity, including systems designed to provide anti- jam and
survivable nuclear command and control. It is unlikely (and unaffordable)
that future MILSATCOM systems will fully meet rapidly expanding capacity
requirements. Therefore, commercial SATCOM will be needed to fill the
gap.
The dependency on radio repeaters in space will only increase in
the future because satellites are a key method of connecting the isolated
warfighter to the Department of Defense Information Networks and
ultimately enabling network-centric warfare. The Department of Defense
Information Networks are a globally interconnected, end-to-end set of
information capabilities, associated processes, and personnel for
collecting, processing, storing, disseminating, and managing information
on demand to warfighters, policy makers, and support personnel.
All encompassing, the Department of Defense Information Networks
include all owned and leased communications, computing systems and
services, software applications, system data, security, and other
associated services necessary to achieve information superiority.
Eventually, the Department of Defense Information Networks will connect
all troops, weapons platforms, sensors, and command and control nodes.
At its basic level, the Department of Defense Information Networks are
“networks which provide voice, data, video, and facilitate more than
just the passing of targeting information through sensor-to-shooter
loops; such a grid also provides, for example, real-time collaboration
and dynamic planning.”
HISTORY OF SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS
In May 1946, Project RAND released Preliminary Design of an

Experimental World-Circling Spaceship, which stated, “A satellite
vehicle with appropriate instrumentation can be expected to be one of
4
the most potent scientific tools of the Twentieth Century. The
achievement of a satellite craft would produce repercussions comparable
to the explosion of the atomic bomb.” In 1947, Arthur C. Clarke presented
a paper to the scientific community in which he suggested that if we
explored orbits in higher elevations above the Earth, we might achieve
an orbit at which a satellite would be able to serve as a communications
broadcast tool. Until that point, we were beginning explorations of what
we today would call low-earth-orbit satellites, which means the
satellites travelled at relatively low altitudes over the earth,
revolving around the earth much faster than the earth rotates on its own
axis. Clarke theorized that if a satellite was sent into a higher orbit,
it would encounter a geosynchronous orbit, meaning that the satellite
would rotate around the earth at exactly the same rate at which the earth
rotates on its axis; the orbiting device would appear to hang stationary
over a given point on earth. Clarke’s hypotheses were supported and thus
began the development of the communications sector for the space
industry.
The first artificial satellite was Sputnik 1, launched by the Soviet
Union on October 4, 1957. In the United States, NASA launched the first
experimental communications satellite in 1963. The first commercial
communications satellite was launched two years later in 1965 marking
the beginning of the use of satellite communications to support public
telephony as well as television, particularly international television.
Since then, large numbers of satellites have been launched. At this
point, there are more than 250 communications-based satellites in space,
as well as hundreds of other specialized satellites used for
meteorological purposes, defense, remote sensing, geological
exploration, and so on. More than 700 satellites orbit the earth and
it seems that
many more satellites will be launched in the
future.
There are still approximately 3 billion
people on the planet who are not served by even
basic communications services, and it is
impossible to deploy enough wire-line facilities
in a short enough time frame to equalize the
situation worldwide. Therefore,
satellites are very important in bringing infrastructure into areas of
the world that have not previously enjoyed that luxury. Conveniently,
many of these underdeveloped areas are the same ones that United States
Marines conduct operations and therefore require connectivity.
5
SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS THEORY
Simply, SATCOM is a large radio repeater or relay situated on high

ground. In this case, the high ground is space. Meanwhile on Earth,
satellite terminals are required for receiving and transmitting the
signals from and to the satellite. The frequency used by a SATCOM
terminal to the satellite is the uplink frequency, and the frequency
from the satellite to the SATCOM terminal is the downlink frequency. A
SATCOM terminal is defined as any terminal used to connect a user to a
satellite through the electromagnetic spectrum. The terminal may be an
airborne, naval, or ground facility and can be fixed, mobile, or
standalone.
The purpose of the space-based radio relay is to overcome the
challenges of distance or obstructions inherent in terrestrial-based
architectures for radio link microwave transmitters. However, the
disadvantage posed by the great distances involved is signal attenuation,
or the minor loss of signal strength. Overcoming said attenuation
requires much greater transmit power and receiver sensitivity. In today’s
satellite systems, this delay time primarily affects voice
communications and can take nearly 240 milliseconds due to the required
propagation time.
COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITE MODULES
In general, a communications satellite is comprised of two modules:

the spacecraft bus or service module and the communications payload. The
spacecraft bus, or service module, provides the support platform for the
communications payload. The communications payload contains the
transponders, antennas, and, for some communications satellites, cross-
links. A transponder provides the capability to amplify received radio
signals from the uplink antennas. It also sorts the input signals and
directs the output signals through input/output signal multiplexers to
the proper downlink antennas. The antennas receive radio signals from
and transmit to SATCOM terminals. Cross-links provide connectivity
between satellites without going through a SATCOM terminal.
a. Transponder. The transponder is the heart of the satellite.

Acting as a repeater in the sky, the transponder receives transmissions
from the ground or user segments, amplifies the received signal, changes
its frequency, and transmits the signal back to Earth. The number of
transponders for a given satellite depends on the transponder’s power,
weight, and application.
6
b. Satellite Bandwidth. Transponders are built to receive and
transmit signals within a limited band of frequencies. The number of
Hertz spanned describes the transponder’s bandwidth (analog bandwidth);
the greater the bandwidth, the greater the potential channel capacity.
The mathematical relationship is described by the Shannon-Hartley
Theorem. The Shannon-Hartley Theorem states that for a given bandwidth,
capacity increases as a signal’s power is made greater than noise power.
However, noise power increases as bandwidth increases. Therefore, wider
bandwidth does not necessarily mean greater throughput.
Nerd Blurb:
Where,
C is the channel capacity in bits per second;

B is the bandwidth of the channel in Hertz;
S is the average received signal power over the bandwidth;
N is the average noise or interference power over the bandwidth;
S/N is the signal-to-noise ratio of the communication signal to
the Gaussian noise interference
i. Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Signal-to-Noise Ratio (S/N) is the

proportion of the usable or desired signal (S) to the noise (N), or
undesired signal.
ii. Energy per Bit to Noise Power Spectral Density Ratio

(Eb/N0). Signal-to-Noise Ratio per Bit. The ratio given by Eb/N0, where
Eb is the signal energy per bit and N0 is the noise energy per Hertz of
noise bandwidth.
c. Capacity. Transponder power and bandwidth influence how many

channels a satellite can provide. Increasing power can increase the
number of channels. Polarization diversity can increase the number of
channels within bandwidth as well. Multiple access techniques enable
sharing of capacity.
i. Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA). A technique

used for sharing a single transmission channel among two or more users
by assigning each to an exclusive frequency band within the channel.
Frequency bandwidth is divided and assigned to specific users. Each user
receives a portion of the frequency spectrum in the form of
7
receive and transmit frequencies. Simply put, FDMA affords the user
“some of the bandwidth, all of the time.”
ii. Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA). A technique used

for allocating a discrete amount of frequency bandwidth to each user, in
order to permit many simultaneous conversations with each user assigned
a specific timeslot for transmission. Bandwidth is allocated amongst
users based on time slots in a cyclic scheme. Simply put, TDMA affords
the user “all of the bandwidth, some of the time.”
SATELLITE FREQUENCY SPECTRUM
According to Air Force Doctrine Document 2-2, “where communication

lines cannot be laid, or when terrain and other line-of- sight radio
frequency limitations hamper terrestrial based communications, space
communications keep forward and rear echelons in contact.” SATCOM systems
contain a number of components that provide the ability to communicate
effectively worldwide. These include the frequencies available for
utilization within the electromagnetic spectrum through which SATCOM
systems operate.
The SATCOM systems used today typically operate in the ultra-high
frequency (UHF), super-high frequency (SHF), or extremely-high frequency
(EHF) ranges. Some of the systems that operate in these frequency ranges
are described in the below table, which also provides information on the
radio spectrum, or the bands used by respective satellites, and the
corresponding utilization of those bands.
Band Frequencies Utilization

UHF 300 MHz to 3 GHz TV broadcast, mobile satellite,
land mobile, global positioning
systems, Mobile User Objective
System (MUOS), UHF follow-on
(UFO)
SHF (C-, X-, 3 to 30 GHz Satellite TV, Defense Satellite
Ku-, K-, Ka-) Communications System (DSCS),
Wideband Global SATCOM (WGS)
EHF 30 to 300 GHz Military strategic and tactical
relay (Milstar), Advanced
Extremely High Frequency (AEHF)
System
8
CURRENT MILITARY SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS ENTERPRISE
The current MILSATCOM enterprise consists of four areas: protected,

wideband, wideband broadcast, and narrowband. See the figure below for
the capabilities inherent in each of these areas. A fifth area,
commercial SATCOM systems, also integrates with MILSATCOM services to
give warfighters additional capacity and greater flexibility through
redundancy.
Each system within these five areas offers unique advantages,
making it particularly suitable to fulfill specific warfighting needs.
Together, they provide a robust, cost-effective integrated MILSATCOM
architecture that satisfies critical Department of Defense requirements.
Today, the DOD SATCOM enterprise architecture comprises four
primary systems (all in geosynchronous orbits) operating in UHF, SHF,
and EHF ranges:
1. UHF Follow-on (UFO) satellites
2. SHF Defense Satellite Communications System (DSCS)
3. Wideband Global SATCOM (WGS) satellites
4. EHF Milstar satellites
Protected Wideband Wideband Narrowband Commercial

Broadcast
EHF SHF Ka-Band UHF L, C, Ku, Ka-Band
MILSTAR I/II DSCS UFO UFO  Growing

 High protection  High data rates  GBS Ka- payload  Lightweight, capability
 Comm crosslinks for tactical on UFO mobile  High throughput
 Survivable comm and enterprise satellites terminals; COTM  No protection
users  High throughput  Low data rate  Pay for
AEHF  Reach-back for  Small antennas  Push-to-talk services
 Improved DISN  Smart push/pull combat C2  Mobile
throughput  Some Anti-Jam Satellite
 Improved WGS MUOS System for COTM
coverage WGS  X- & Ka-Bands  6-10x capacity
 Increased  Handheld
throughput terminals
 Platform COTM  Networking OTM
 Add Ka-band  Full GIG
integration
Military and Commercial Satellite Systems are Essential to Provide Critical Communications for
the Deployed Warfighter
a. Ultra-High Frequency Communications. After replacing the Navy’s

fleet SATCOM system, the UFO constellation became the primary DOD system
for tactical mobile communications. Now providing UHF, EHF, and Global
Broadcast Service (GBS) capabilities on a worldwide basis, the UFO
satellite system plays a vital role in meeting DOD’s
9
voice, data, and video transmission needs. The most prevalent users are
ground forces (both Army and Marine Corps) which account for 85 percent
of the users of ultra-high frequency satellite communications. As
mentioned earlier, the Air Force oversees most of DOD’s space systems;
the Navy is responsible for narrowband satellite communications. The
UFO constellation consists of eight active spacecraft plus an in-orbit
spare, which are in geosynchronous orbits. In addition to supporting
ground forces, UFO supports the Navy’s global communications network,
serving ships at sea and other government entities, including the White
House, State Department, and Department of Homeland Security.
UHF satellite end-user terminals, or antennas, are typically small
and portable enough to be carried deep into military theaters of
operation. The UHF frequency offers the capability of penetrating jungle
foliage and inclement weather, as well as urban canyons. There are around
20,000 terminals in use across the DOD today.
b. Super-High Frequency Communications. Two military satellite

systems operate in the SHF range: the Defense Satellite Communications
System and the Wideband Global SATCOM satellites.
i. Defense Satellite Communications System. The Defense

Satellite Communications System is a worldwide military satellite
network managed under USSTRATCOM by the Defense Information Systems
Agency (DISA). DSCS consists of space and satellite segments along with
ground terminals that operate in the SHF band to provide long- haul
multichannel communications connectivity. The system is an important
part of the comprehensive plan to support globally distributed military
users on the ground, at sea, or in the air.
ii. Wideband Global SATCOM. The Wideband Global SATCOM,

previously known as the Wideband Gapfiller Satellite System, provides
additional capability to the current DSCS constellation and will
eventually take over for DSCS to reduce the amount of commercial
satellite communications capability that is required by the Department
of Defense today. The WGS Block I satellites provide DOD with the highest
capacity communication satellite, offering a quantum leap in
communications bandwidth for airmen, soldiers, sailors and Marines.
iii. Military Strategic and Tactical Relay. The Milstar

satellite system is a joint asset developed by the Air Force and has a
satellite cross-linking capability that enables control from anywhere on
Earth. Milstar provides highly robust, secure, and survivable
communications among fixed-site and mobile terminals. Milstar’s unique
capabilities enable U.S. forces to maintain information superiority
throughout all levels of conflict, enhancing full- dimensional
protection and ensuring that warfighters retain freedom of action through
continuous, secure, jam-resistant communication.
Milstar has a couple of features that distinguish it from earlier
satellite communication systems. First, the Milstar satellite serves as
a smart switchboard in space, allowing users to establish critical
communication networks on the fly. Secondly, the Milstar system uses
10
a satellite-to-satellite cross-link to provide worldwide connectivity
without the use of vulnerable and expensive ground relay stations.
c. Future Military SATCOM Systems. New military SATCOM systems are

under development. These future systems will give the DOD a greater
capacity for transmitting data, higher transmission speed, and increased
user access to data.
i. Mobile User Objective System. The Mobile User Objective

System (MUOS) is the next generation of U.S. military tactical UHF SATCOM
developed by the U.S. Navy for DOD. The MUOS constellation will replace
the UFO satellite constellation currently in operation and will
significantly increase both the capability of users and the number of
potential users. When fully fielded, MUOS will provide an aggregate of
40,216 Kbps for the warfighter, compared to the legacy UFO system’s
aggregate of 2,666 Kbps. The increase means future warfighters will have
more than 16,332 simultaneous accesses (voice, video, data) at 2.4
kilobits per second (kbps), compared to 1,111 accesses provided by the
present UFO satellite system at the same data rate. Consequently, more
terminals will be used for mobile connectivity at the lowest tactical
level.
The next-generation UHF satellite system provides the warfighter
10 times more capacity with higher data rates than today’s UHF military
system. It supports handheld terminals, which will enable the
warfighter, whether mobile or static, to access the Department of Defense
Information System.
DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE INFORMATION SYSTEMS NETWORK ACCESS
The purpose of satellite communications is to extend connectivity

from the Department of Defense Information Systems Network to the
warfighter operating in remote locations where terrestrial systems
cannot meet supportability requirements. Focusing primarily on reach-
back services to the Department of Defense Information Systems Network,
there are two key components that allow this to take place - they are
the STEP and Teleport sites. Both serve as entry points for tactical
forces to the Department of Defense Information Systems Network and are
strategically located throughout the world.
a. Standard Tactical Entry Points

(STEP). STEP sites handle a variety of
services including Defense Switch Network
(DSN), Defense Red Switch Network (DRSN),
NIPRNET, SIPRNET, Joint Worldwide
Intelligence Communications System (JWICS),
and Defense Video Services (DVS) allowing a
11
tactical network, via satellite, to transmit and receive critical
information including reconnaissance videos, surveillance photos,
intelligence, and re-supply orders.
STEP sites are located around the world to provide Department of
Defense Information Systems Network services between tactical and
strategic communications systems for CONUS Combatant Commanders and
other DOD organizations. There are currently 16 active STEP sites, 11 of
which are dual sites that have two or more satellite terminals. STEP
sites all have single frequency, X-band terminals connecting to the DSCS
network; however, many of the large STEP sites are now multicarrier
capable (X, C, Ku, and Ka bands) due to the addition of Teleport sites.
b. Teleport. Teleport is an extension of the DISN and provides

reach-back services to joint forces worldwide. The Teleport sites use
commercial and military satellite bands and offer higher throughputs
than STEP sites, multiple hop range extensions between theatres, and
cross-banding between satellite frequencies.
SATELLITE AND GATEWAY ACCESS PLANNING
Users wishing to utilize the STEP/Teleport sites for DISN access

while in CONUS or deployed must request the service in advance of their
required date. In addition to the normal security requirements [i.e.
Certification and Accreditation Package], a tactical connection to a
STEP/Teleport site requires a Gateway Access Authorization (GAA) and the
connection to the satellite requires a Satellite Access Authorization
(SAA).
a. Satellite Access Request (SAR). SARs are prepared and submitted

for access to strategic satellite systems to provide worldwide
connectivity in the tactical, warfighting environment. SARs are normally
submitted 45 days prior to an exercise. Lead time may vary from unit to
unit. A satellite access request is sent to the Regional Space Support
Center (RSSC). The request specifies the satellite access required by
the requesting entity. DISA responds with a mission directive and a
Satellite Access Authorization (SAA). The priority and purpose of the
request, based on the MAGTF mission, should determine the speed at which
satellite access is granted. The SAA reserves time on the satellite, but
has little to do with the STEP site. Access may be granted to the
satellite depending on your priority compared to other users. The SAR
is normally composed by a Tactical Communications Planning and
Engineering Officer (TCPEO), MOS 0620. The TCPEO will normally
consult with SATCOM Operators, MOS
12
0627, to ensure that the document is technically accurate before it is
submitted to the RSSC via the appropriate chain of command.
b. Gateway Access Request (GAR). GARs are prepared and submitted

for access to the DISN in order to provide worldwide secure and non-
secure voice, video, and data connectivity in the tactical, warfighting
environment. The GAR is submitted in conjunction with the SAR 45 days
prior to an exercise. Lead time may vary from unit to unit. The GAR is
a request to reserve connectivity time to the DISN via a STEP or
Teleport. The GAR also informs DISA of what equipment is being employed
at the exercise location and services requested. Accessing the
STEP/Teleport depends on priority compared to other users requesting
services. Like the SAR, the GAR is typically completed by the TCPEO
with input from the remainder of the Systems Planning and Engineering
Cell as well as Technical Controllers, MOS 2821 and 2823. Upon
submission, DISA validates requirements and allocates assets to support.
If approved, DISA issues a Gateway Access Authorization (GAA) to the
requesting unit. This document should be issued no later than 72 hours
prior to the desired STEP/Teleport access date. The unit technical
controller should be in contact with the STEP in the days leading up to
the exercise to review the details of the GAA and conduct last minute
coordination.
REFERENCES

Communications
3. Telecommunications Essentials, Second Edition
4. JSC-HDBK-97-001, Joint Spectrum Management for the Electromagnetic
Spectrum
5. UHF MILSATCOM Operator’s Handbook
6. NTP-3, Naval Telecommunications Procedures
8. ASC-1&3, DSCS Satellite Policy and Procedures
9. Army Satellite Communications Architecture Book 2003
10. Marine Corps Systems Command Communications and Networking Systems
Fact Book
11. Air Force Doctrine Document 2-2, Space Operations
12. Air University-18 Space Primer, Second Edition, Chapter 14,
Satellite Communications
13. Joint Publication 2-01, Joint and National Intelligence Support to
Military Operations
13
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
SATELLITE EARTH TERMINALS
ECC E07
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED
1. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Antenna

Control Unit per Satellite Technology: Principles and Applications,
2nd Edition (0602-PLAN-1103mk).
2. Without the aid of reference, define in writing High Power

Amplifier per Satellite Technology: Principles and Applications, 2nd
Edition (0602-PLAN-1103ml).
3. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Low-Noise

Block Downconverter per Satellite Technology: Principles and
Applications, 2nd Edition (0602-PLAN-1103mm).
4. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Block

Upconverter, per Satellite Technology: Principles and Applications,
2nd Edition (0602-PLAN-1103mn).
5. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Modem, per

Satellite Technology: Principles and Applications, 2nd Edition (0602-
PLAN-1103mo).
6. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing

the definition of a point-to-point satellite communications network
configuration per Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Manual (CJCSM)
6231.04B (Joint Transmission System) (0602-PLAN-1103kq).

the definition of a hub-spoke satellite communications network
6231.04B (Joint Transmission System) (0602-PLAN-1103kr).

the definition of a mesh satellite communications network
6231.04B (Joint Transmission System) (0602-PLAN-1103ks).

the definition of a hybrid mesh satellite communications network
6231.04B (Joint Transmission System) (0602-PLAN-1103kt).
INTRODUCTION
Satellite systems are complex, dynamic communications platforms

that require an immense amount of study and knowledge to create and
maintain. Consisting of Earth, Space, and Control Stations, these systems
enable worldwide communications where terrestrial methods would
otherwise fail. Consequently, learning the generalities of these
intricate structures will ease the troubleshooting process through the
knowledge of how satellites work and how to dissect their technical
diagrams.
The focus of this section is the Earth Station, which Marine Corps
operators spend the most of their time installing, operating, and
maintaining in the field. The equipment found in this section can be
found in all of the Marine Corps’ standard satellite systems (albeit in
many different forms and with many different names).
EARTH STATIONS
An Earth Station is a terminal system mainly located on the

Earth’s surface. These stations can be
fixed or mobile terminals and can be
installed on land, in the air, or at sea.
The Earth Station is intended for
communication with one or more manned or
unmanned Space or terrestrial stations
of the same type via one or more
reflecting satellites or other objects
in space. Furthermore, the installation
of Earth Stations allow for a
communications footprint to be
established and fed to surrounding areas
via LOS methods. This flexible
capability, being very beneficial for all levels of command, have
provided a means to extend voice, video, and data services where only
radio services were available in the past.
Not all Earth Stations operate the
same. Depending on their use, some of
these systems are single function
stations, which can either transmit or
receive signals but not both. Examples
of this are Global Broadcast Systems
(GBS), which only receive news and
military channels at each terminal, and
Global Positioning System (GPS) anklets
and collars for tracking wildlife, which
only transmit their position to the GPS
system.
ANATOMY OF A SATCOM TERMINAL
All Earth Stations have two main sections: the Outdoor Unit (the
Radio Frequency or RF Section) and the Indoor Unit (or the Baseband
Section). These two sections allow the site to process, multiplex,
modulate, demodulate, and amplify signals in order to reliably transmit
and receive information. Understanding the signal flow through the
generalized equipment string will provide a meaningful base of knowledge
for working with any and all satellite systems.
OUTDOOR UNIT: RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) SECTION
Starting from the most noticeable portion, the Outdoor Unit

comprises the antenna, Antenna Control Unit (ACU), circulator, High Power
Amplifier, and block converters and is responsible for the transmission
and reception of all signals pertaining to the Earth Station. Any
degradation in this section will reflect a noticeable decline in Quality
of Service (QOS) as faulty signal propagation introduces unwanted errors
in the restoration of the original information.
a. Antenna. A standard satellite dish antenna works by

concentrating signals that are picked up along its axis to a single
point, the focal point. The receiving amplifier is usually placed near
the focal point and the concentrated signals are collected into the
receiver using a small horn. This serves to further concentrate the
signals to get the maximum possible
signal level at the amplifier input.
Antenna shapes and sizes vary but
they all focus the signals they receive
from a specific point in space onto a
small area where they can be received
and amplified.
The principle works in exactly the
same way for transmitting a signal.
The transmit amplifier produces a large signal to a horn set at the focal
point. The signal is then radiated onto the dish (through the same horn
used to pick up the receive signals) which in turn focuses the transmit
signal into a parallel beam of energy out into space to the satellite.
The transmit amplifier is also positioned as close to the focal
point as possible to reduce losses. The horn used to transmit and receive
the signals to and from the
reflector is called a feed horn and is
placed at the focal point also known as
the feed point.
The focal point can be offset from
the main axis so that the receiving
equipment does not obstruct the beam in
any way. This offset has the effect of
raising the beam of the antenna. The
exact amount that the beam is raised is
equal to the amount of offset. Thus, if the offset is 20 degrees then
the beam is raised by 20 degrees.
b. Antenna Control Unit. In order to ensure the antenna is “locked”

on the satellite (meaning the terminal is receiving the strongest
possible signal from the satellite);
the Antenna Control Unit (ACU) performs
satellite acquisition and tracking. Satellite
acquisition is the process of locating the
satellite using algorithmic searching
techniques. Once the signal received from the
satellite is strong enough to pass traffic, the
ACU continually updates its’ position to
maintain the signal strength - effectively
tracking the satellite.
Correspondingly, the main components
necessary to complete these processes are the
Antenna Control System, the Servo motor, and the necessary search
algorithms. The Antenna Control System contains all of the programming
necessary to perform satellite acquisition and tracking. This unit
receives the signal strength information from the Outdoor Unit and
provides the movement parameters to the Servo motor. The Servo motor is
then used to physically point the terminal’s antenna in the supposed
satellite position. As a last resort (in the rare case that the Antenna
Control System and the Servo motor are inoperable), this process can be
achieved manually by trained subject matter experts.
c. Circulator. The circulator is used to make sure that the

transmit signals go out through the dish and not back into the receive
chain. It also makes sure that the receive signals come from the dish
into the receive chain and not into the transmit chain. It works much
like a traffic circle in principle. This is often referred to as an
Orthomode Transducer (OMT) and is, these days, built into the feed
assembly.
d. High Power Amplifier. The High Power Amplifier (HPA) has one
job – boost the transmit signal (uplink) to enable the antenna to beam
the up to the satellite. These can range in power from a few watts to
over 1,000 watts in power. Usually, the bigger the dish, the bigger the
power amplifier.
e. Low-Noise Block Downconverter. The Low-Noise Block

Downconverter (LNB) is used in the receiving (downlink) of satellite
signals. It is a combination of a low-noise amplifier and a frequency
mixer. It receives the microwave signal from the satellite collected by
the dish, amplifies it, downconverts the block of frequencies to a lower
block of frequencies usable by the modem.
f. Block Upconverter. The Block Upconverter (BUC) is used in the

transmission (uplink) of satellite signals. It converts a band of
frequencies from a lower frequency to a higher frequency usable by the
satellite.
Modern BUCs LNB
convert from the
L-band to Ku-,
C-, X-, and Ka-
band. They now BUC
need to be moved
up the frequency
spectrum so that
the HPA can
amplify them and
transmit them Feed Horn
through the
antenna. An
example would be
the up-
conversion of
Intermediate
Frequency (IF)
to 1 GHz (L-
band). The up-
converter then
up-converts the
L-band signals
Circulator
to a Radio Frequency (RF) usable by the satellite and then is ready
for the HPA to transmit through the antenna.
INDOOR UNIT: BASEBAND SECTION
The Indoor Unit includes the modems, signal

multiplexers/demultiplexers, and other processing circuits that allow
the data to be aggregated and split to transmit and receive data,
respectively.
a. Modulator/Demodulator (Modem). As mentioned previously, these

two units are often combined as one and are known as modems. Modems are
used to convert data into binary form and back.
b. Signal Processors. Signal multiplexers, otherwise known as

signal processors, are used to combine all inputs into one aggregated
signal and return received aggregates to their respective forms (voice,
video, data, etc.). After these two general processes are complete, there
could be multiple forms of signal conditioning in order to ensure the
quality of uplinks and downlinks. For example, Frequency Division
Multiple Access (FDMA) and Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
processing could be used to provide multiple access and quality of
service. Note: Each FDMA circuit requires one modem for each separate
connection to the Earth Station (one modem per spoke at the hub in a
Hub-Spoke configuration). This is most notably seen in the LMST and
Phoenix equipment strings.
EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS
There are four conceptual types of employment methods for the

majority of the Earth Stations in the Marine Corps inventory. They are
as follows:
a. Point-to-Point. In a point-to-point (PTP) configuration, each

terminal combines all information to be sent to the distant end into a
single output and transmits it to the satellite. A unique transmit
frequency is assigned to each terminal, and there is enough difference
between the frequencies to prevent the signals from interfering with one
another. Each signal is processed by the satellite and retransmitted
toward the earth to become the receive signal for the distant end
terminal.
In the point-to-point configuration, connectivity is limited to
two terminals.
b. Hub-Spoke. The hub-spoke configuration performs the same

communication function as four full duplex PTP satellite links.
Unlike actual PTP operation, however, two frequency assignments are not
required for each link. Instead, each terminal in the network requires
only one frequency assignment. This is because outgoing signals from the
hub terminal to all distant end terminals are combined and transmitted
at the same center frequency. All distant end terminals (spokes)
receive the same signal after the satellite retransmits it. Each spoke
terminal then separates the information intended for that terminal from
the combined signal and ignores the information intended for the other
terminals. Since each spoke terminal communicates only with the hub,
only signals destined for the hub are combined into the spoke
transmissions.
c. Mesh. Operation in a mesh configuration is similar to operation

in a hub-spoke configuration. Terminals that communicate with only one
distant end terminal operate in the same manner as spoke terminals in a
hub-spoke configuration. Each terminal with multiple distant ends
transmits combined signals to all distant end terminals exactly as a hub
terminal in a hub-spoke configuration. Unlike operation in a hub-spoke
configuration, the signals received by terminals with multiple distant
ends include information intended for other terminals. In that case, the
desired information must be separated from those signals and the
remaining ignored in the same manner as signals received by spoke
terminals.
d. Hybrid Mesh/Nodal. At times, terminals serving as a hub may need

to communicate with both other hubs and spokes simultaneously. This form
of connectivity is a combination of mesh and point-to-point
connectivity. It allows a hub to communicate with up to four other
terminals that may be any combination of hub or spoke. This is especially
pertinent with the LMST dual mission capability (STEP entry on one
antenna and hub/spoke to subordinate units).
SATELLITE TERMINAL PLANNING
In planning for the installation and operation of a satellite

terminal there are a number of factors to consider. A general overview
of the planning requirements is the topic of this next section.
SAR/GAR. In planning to implement any satellite terminal, the first step

will always be submitting the Satellite Access Request (SAR) and Gateway
Access Request (GAR). Failure to do this within the appropriate timeline
will prevent access to both the satellite and STEP/Teleport site. Once
the SAR/GAR has been approved, a Satellite Access Authorization (SAA)
and Gateway Access Authorization (GAA) will be issued to the requesting
unit indicating the setup parameters for both the RF and baseband
equipment. It is extremely important to identify your requirements early
in the planning process in order to have sufficient time for the SAA/GAA
to be returned to the requesting unit.
Site Selection. Site suitability is also critical when planning for

satellite terminals. Here are a few general guidelines to consider:
1. Satellite terminal must have unobstructed LOS with the

approved satellite. Mountains, trees, buildings, ridgelines, must not
block the satellite terminal’s antenna.
2. Avoid areas of RFI and EMI since these will increase noise
levels within the SATCOM channel and will in turn degrade the capacity
of that channel.
3. Check the SAA for the orbital slot (azimuth) that you will use
to point the terminal antenna to the satellite. Note that take off
angles close to the horizon can cause problems depending on locations
and obstructions in the area.
4. Be aware of the satellite you are accessing and its footprint

coverage area. Outer areas of the satellites footprint can cause issues
since in these areas attenuation of the RF signal from the terminal to
the satellite is more common.
5. Space weather
conditions affect satellite
communications
a. Sun: sunspots,
solar flares, solar wind
b. Weather:
sandstorms, rain, fog, high
humidity
6. The higher up within

the electromagnetic spectrum the
greater bandwidth capacity there
is available BUT also the more
sensitive the signal will be to
atmospheric conditions (high
water vapor content).
7. Embarkation is always a question. What do you need to move

your equipment from point A to B?
8. Satellite Access Authorizations should be utilized to develop

bootfiles and dictate other configuration settings as required.
REFERENCES
1. Satellite Technology: Principles and Applications, 2nd Edition

2. CJCSM 6231.04A Manual for Employing Joint Tactical Communications,
Joint Transmission Systems
3. Newton’s Telecom Dictionary (24th Edition)
4. TM 10877A/10878A-12&P/1 (LMST Operator/Maintainer Manual)
5. TM 11-5895-1830-12&P AN/TSC-156C Operator/Maintainer Manual
8. TM 08658A14/P, TRC-170 Operator/Maintainer Manual
9. Basic Satellite Antenna Theory, SATCOMS UK,
http://www.satcoms.org.uk
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
AN/USC-65 LIGHTWEIGHT MULTIBAND SATELLITE TERMINAL
ECC E08
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED
1. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the four

super high frequency (SHF) bands in which the AN/USC-65 (LMST)
operates per TM 10877A/10878A-12&P/1D (0602-PLAN-1103eu).

data rate of the AN/USC-65 (LMST) in enhanced mode per TM
10877A/10878A-12&P/1D (0602-PLAN-1103ex).
3. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the AN/USC-

65 (LMST) version that is capable of supporting a dual link mission,
per TM 10877A/10878A-12&P/1D (0602-PLAN-1103ew).
4. Without the aid of reference and given a prescribed terminal

version and antenna configuration, identify in writing the number of
simultaneous communications links the AN/USC-65 (LMST) is capable of
supporting, per TM 10877A/10878A-12&P/1D (0602-PLAN-1103ev).

appropriate multichannel radio symbol for the AN/USC-65 (LMST) in
1103ls).
2
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The LMST is configured as a lightweight, highly mobile, self-

contained satellite terminal, which sets up in 2 hours or less using two
trained operators. The LMST is capable of the following:
1. Operating over four SHF frequency bands:
a. C-band (3.625 – 6.425 GHz)
b. X-Band (7.25 – 8.4 GHz)
c. Ku-band (10.95 – 14.5 GHz)
d. Ka-Band (20.2 – 31 GHz)
2. Multi-channel Data Rates up to 8 Mbps (Legacy) and is

upgradeable to 20 Mbps (Enhanced)
3. Operates in single or dual antenna

operation
4. Depending on variant, can accept 4

– 6 downlinks as a hub
5. Operates with:
a. Defense Satellite
Communications System (DSCS)
b. North Atlantic Treaty

Organization (NATO) NATO III and NATO IV
c. International Telecommunications Satellite Organization

(INTELSAT)
d. European Telecommunications Satellite Organization

(EUTELSAT)
e. Pan American Satellite Organization (PANAMSAT) or
Domestic Satellite (DOMSAT)
f. Wideband Global SATCOM System (WGS)
6. Interoperability:
a. AN/TSC-156C (Phoenix) and VSAT-L
b. Standardized Tactical Entry Point (STEP) Sites
c. Teleport Sites
3
There are two hardware versions of the LMST. The AN/USC-65 (V1)
is the Maxi-Hub version (4 cases) that provides up to six simultaneous
communications paths using 2 antennas (dual link mission).
The AN/USC-65 (V1) is capable of simultaneously controlling the

internal antenna and an external X-band antenna (AS-3199), OE-361, AS-
3036, AS-4429 (LHGXA) and the Tri-band (C, X, Ku) Transportable Antenna
(AS-4429 modified).
The AN/USC-65 (V2) is the Mini-Hub version (3 cases) that provides

up to four simultaneous communications paths using 1 antenna.
AN/USC–65 (V2)
Note: A Mini-Hub can be converted to a Maxi-Hub by adding an additional

IF transit case, interconnect cabling and the proper VME (Versa Module
European) card compliment.
Major Components. The AN/USC-65(V) is comprised of 3 to 4 cases depending

on the variant. These cases include IF transit case (2 for V1 and 1 for
V2), MUX Control case, and the antenna case.
a. IF Transit Case. Located within the IF Transit case is all the

equipment that is designed to convert the supergroup aggregate from the
Satellite Hub Multiplexer (SHM) to an analog signal for transmission.
Depending on the variant, the LMST will either have 1 or 2 IF cases.
4
b. MUX/Control Transit Case. Located within the MUX/Control
Transit Case is all your technical control functions used in combining
all user inputs into a supergroup aggregate.
The Satellite Hub Multiplexer (SHM) multiplexes digital input

signals into a single composite data stream (supergroup) for transmission
and de-multiplexes one or more (depending on variant) received composite
data streams into individual data streams.
c. Antenna Case. The antenna case contains the high power

amplifier controller and Block Up/Down converters for conversion of L-
Band frequencies to either C-, X-, Ku-, and Ka-Band (receive only)
frequencies and vice versa.
d. Antenna. The AN/USC-65 LMST includes a 2.5 meter parabolic

antenna that includes (2) Antenna Controllers and the (2) High Power
Amplifiers (HPA). The AN/USC-65 (V1) can also utilize the AS-3036,
OE-361, or the Lightweight High Gain X-band Antenna (LHGXA) or the
Large Aperture Multi-band Deployable Antenna (LAMBDA) as the second
antenna. The LMST 2.5 meter antenna is also equipped with (4) types
of feed cones depending on the band in use.
5
X-band (7.25 - 8.4 GHz) C-band (3.625 - 6.425 GHz)
Ku-band (10.95 - 14.5 GHz) Ka-band (20.2 -31 GHZ)
Installable RF Feeds
The following antennas are interoperable with the AN/USC-65 (V1)

satellite terminal:
The AS-3036/TSC is an 8’ antenna. It has a gain of 42.8 dBi.
AS-3036/TSC
The OE-361 (V2) is a 20’ parabolic dish antenna with a gain of 50 dBi
and is a ruggedized, quick reaction satellite antenna (QRSA) designed
for rapid deployment.
OE-361 (V2)
The AS-4429/TSC is a 16’, Lightweight High Gain X-Band Antenna (LHGXA)

that has a gain of 51 dBi, is built on to a trailer chassis, and is
not an SL-3 component. It operates solely in X-Band.
6
The AS-4429D/TSC Large Aperture Multi-band Deployable Antenna (LAMDA)
looks identical to the LHGXA and is capable of operating in the C, X,
Ku and Ka bands.
AS-4429/TSC
DOCUMENTATION
The AN/USC-65 is depicted in multichannel radio diagrams via the

below symbols:
65-1 65-1 65-1 65-1
X C Ku Ka
AN/USC-65(V1)–X AN/USC-65(V1)–C AN/USC-65(V1)–Ku AN/USC-65(V1)–Ka
65-2 65-2 65-2 65-2
X C Ku Ka
AN/USC-65(V2)–X AN/USC-65(V2)–C AN/USC-65(V2)–Ku AN/USC-65(V2)–Ka
7
EMPLOYMENT CONSIDERATIONS
The LMST is compatible with CV-series signal converters and the

Deployable Integrated Transport Suite. The most common method of
employment for the LMST (V1) is shown below (hybrid mesh):
REFERENCES

2. CJCSM 6231.04A Manual for Employing Joint Tactical Communications,
Joint Transmission Systems
4. TM 10877A/10878A-12&P/1 (LMST Operator/Maintainer Manual)
5. ASC-1&3 DSCS Satellite Policy and Procedures
8
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
AN/TSC-154 SECURE MOBILE ANTI-JAM RELIABLE TACTICAL TERMINAL (SMART-T)
ECC E10
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED
1. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the frequency

bands associated with the AN/TSC-154 (SMART-T), per TM 11- 5895-1612-
12/1. (0602-PLAN-1103ey)

data rate associated with the AN/TSC-154 (SMART-T) employed within Marine
Corps networks, per TM 11-5895-1612-12/1. (0602-PLAN-1103ez)
3. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the number

of Digital Transmission Groups (DTGs) available for use on an AN/TSC-
154, per TM 11-5895-1612-12/1. (0602-PLAN-1103fa)

appropriate multichannel radio symbol for the AN/TSC-154 (SMART-T) in
1103kw).
2
MILSTAR SYSTEM
The MILSTAR system provides anti-jam, secure, survivable

communications for strategic and tactical forces. MILSTAR supports all
levels of conflict and utilizes two frequency bands: EHF for the uplink
and SHF for the downlink. The MILSTAR system consists of satellites in
geosynchronous and polar orbits to provide total earth coverage and
supports crosslinking - the process of transmitting data from one
satellite directly to another satellite in orbit.
Crosslinking
These satellites also include various survivability features

including nuclear hardening, Low Probability of Intercept (LPI), Low
Probability of Detection (LPD), and multiple fixed and mobile control
centers that provide support for the satellites. MILSTAR terminals are
deployed worldwide and include Air Force MILSTAR terminals (airborne,
fixed and mobile ground), Army and USMC SMART-T terminals (mobile
ground), and Navy NESP terminals (submarine, ship and shore).
Each MILSTAR satellite provides fixed and agile antenna beams that
differ depending on if it supports Low Data Rates (LDR) or Medium Data
Rate (MDR) capabilities. Since the USMC’s AN/TSC-154 only uses the MDR
capability, we will focus on the MDR antenna beam coverage.
MILSTAR MDR. The MDR portion of the MILSTAR satellite consists of a

separate Satellite Resource Controller (SRC), Two Nuller Spot Beams (NSB-
A and NSB-B) and Six Distributed User Coverage Area (DUCA-A1, A2, A3,
B1, B2 and B3) antennas that support MDR crosslink capabilities.
1. Each MILSTAR Satellite contains 8 antennas that are all TX/RX

capable.
a. Narrow/Nuller Spot Beams (NSB)
i. Two antennas per satellite
ii. Provide the capability to Null (Block Out) any Jammer
(Off Frequency) Terminal
3
iii. Provide the bulk of the communications for the ARMY
b. Distributed User Coverage Area (DUCA)
i. Six antennas per satellite
ii. Supports Navy Shore sites, Navy battle groups,
tactical submarines, and Air Force users.
NSB and DUCA Beam Antennas

MILSTAR Satellite
MILSTAR Communications Services. The MILSTAR satellite constellation

supports five different types of communications services.
- Conference Network
- Broadcast Network
- Pt to Pt Call (Half Duplex)
- Pt to Pt Call (Full Duplex)
- Dual Simplex
The USMC SMART-T typically utilizes the Dual Simplex service. This
service provides, essentially, a full duplex call or connection allowing
the capability to send and receive traffic simultaneously. The Dual
Simplex network is the most common topology used within the USMC and has
a primary purpose of MSE Range Extension.
Now that we have looked at the basic capabilities and features of
the MILSTAR satellite system, we will focus our attention on the MILSTAR
satellite terminal that is employed by the USMC - The AN/TSC-
154 Secure Mobile Anti-Jam Reliable Tactical Terminal (SMART-T).
4
AN/TSC-154 DESCRIPTION
The SMART-T (Secure Mobile Anti-Jam Reliable Tactical Terminal)

provides tactical users with secure, jam-resistant data and voice
satellite communications up to 2.24 Mbps via MILSTAR Extremely High
Frequency (EHF) satellites and compatible payloads. In addition, the
SMART-T provides Marine Air Ground Task Force (MAGTF) commanders with
extremely reliable, survivable, long-haul
connectivity for core command and control
links.
The AN/TSC-154 is normally used while
mounted on a HMMWV, but can also be employed
on a free standing pedestal when separated
from its vehicle. It provides both point-to-
point and network connectivity for voice and
data communications at Low Data Rate (LDR)
and Medium Data Rate (MDR). The following are
capabilities of the USMC’s AN/TSC-154 SMART-
T:
1. Operates in both the EHF and SHF portion of the electromagnetic

spectrum:
a. Transmit (Uplink) = 43.5 – 45.5 GHz (EHF)
b. Receive (Downlink) = 20.2 – 21.2 GHz (SHF)
2. Maximum Data Rate = 2240 Kbps

a. This includes both orderwire and dedicated user traffic
3. Capable of supporting a maximum of (4) Digital Transmission

Groups (DTGs)
a. Each DTG port can support 128 – 1024 Kbps
b. Two most commonly seen configurations
i. 4 DTGs @ 512 Kbps per DTG
ii. 2 DTGs @ 1024 Kbps per DTG
NOTE: While the maximum data rate for the terminal is 2240 Kbps,
the maximum data rate for any single link is 1024 Kbps. This is
due to the limitations of the DTG ports on the terminal. Combined
DTG data rates can NOT exceed 2048 Kbps.
4. Used as a MILSTAR management terminal

a. Communication Controller (CC) – Terminal designated to
SETUP and TEARDOWN MDR networks.
b. Antenna Controller (AC) – Terminal designated to perform
pointing of LDR and MDR spot beams.
c. Automated Communications Management System (ACMS) – Provides
a uniform way of managing beams and networks. Can perform
both the CC and AC functions.
5
5. Designed to withstand:
a. Biological and chemical attacks
b. Radio Frequency (RF) signaling
c. Jamming
d. Detection
e. Electromagnetic pulse
AN/TSC-154 PRIMARY COMPONENTS
The SMART-T is comprised of four major subsystems: Terminal

Electronics Unit (TEU), Pallet/Pedestal, Antenna Assembly, and the
Operator Devices.
Terminal Electronics Unit. The TEU is a single unit containing various

Circuit Card Assemblies (CCAs) and modules which perform all signal
processing functions for the SMART-T. These functions include:
1. Antenna / Pedestal Control (APC)

2. Frequency Synthesis
3. LDR / MDR Receiver Processing
4. LDR / MDR Modulation / Demodulation
5. Time and Frequency Reference Generation
6. LDR and MDR Baseband Data Processing
7. TRANSEC Encryption / Decryption
8. GPS Receiver Processing
The TEU is comprised of twelve functional modules (or CCAs).

These include:
1. LDR modem
2. MDR modem
3. LDR baseband
4. MDR baseband
5. Synthesizer
6. LDR/MDR Receiver
7. Transmission Security (TRANSEC)
8. Rubidium (RB) Standard
9. Microprocessor Compensated Crystal Oscillator
10. APC
11. Power Supply
12. GPS receiver
6
Terminal Electronics Unit (TEU)
Pallet/Pedestal (P/P). The P/P components provide the following

functions:
1. Support structure for components and antenna

2. Input Power Control
3. User Interface Connections
4. Antenna Positioning Control (APC)
The P/P is comprised of the eight functional units. These

include:
1. Generator
2. Pedestal
3. Pedestal motors and resolvers
4. GPS antenna
5. User Interface Unit (UIU)
6. Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
7. AC / DC converter
8. Pallet legs
7
User Interface Unit (UIU)
Antenna Assembly. Antenna Assembly components provide simultaneous

transmission of EHF uplink and reception of SHF downlink communications
via Milstar satellites. Specifically, these functions include:
1. Amplification and EHF Uplinking

2. SHF Downlinking and Low Noise Amplification
The Antenna Assembly is comprised of six functional units:
1. Reflector
2. Medium Power Transmitter (MPT)
3. Transceiver
4. Compass / Level sensor
5. Subreflector
6. Antenna feed assembly
Gregorian Feed Antenna System
8
Operator Devices. SMART-T operator devices enable the operational
interface for local and remote operations and LDR data input. These
operations include:
1. Terminal configuration
2. MDR and LDR communications
3. Status monitoring
4. Built in Test (BIT)
Operator devices used with the SMART-T are as follows:
1. Local Operator Device (LOD)

2. Remote Operator Unit (ROU)
3. LDR Interface Device (LID)
Access capability designated to any operator device is controlled

by the Interface Device Software (IDS). The LOD and LID are identical
Handheld Terminal Units (HTU). One LOD, one ROU, and one LID are provided
with the system. The SMART-T can accommodate up to four LIDs. All
operator devices are stored in the curbside storage container.
Local/Remote Operator Unit
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Antenna can withstand sustained winds of up to 60 mph (without

degraded performance). The antenna should be stowed, as a safety hazard,
if winds speed exceeds 65 mph (104.6 kph).
9
AN/TSC-154 PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
Documentation.
154
AN/TSC-154
MCPT-i. The Milstar Communications

Planning Tool-integrated provides
operational Milstar apportionment and
mission planning, execution, and
monitoring for both the strategic and
tactical mission areas. All of the link
planning and engineering applications are
integrated into this Microsoft Windows
based desktop management system that can be
used in the field environment.
The MCPT-i is used by unit
communications planners, normally an 0620
Tactical Communications Planning and Engineering Officer (TCPEO), to
coordinate networks which will utilize MILSTAR satellites. MCPT-i will
allow the creation and generation of the unique database required for
each SMART-T to operate on the planned network.
Provided AN/CYZ-10 Data Transfer Device (DTD)

- Includes CT3 software
- Used to load SMART-T database
- Required crypto keys for TRANSEC only
- COMSEC not provided. Accepts data that is encrypted by the
user.
10
Network Considerations. We will next look at some specific network
planning considerations that include Service Identification Numbers,
specific user roles and bandwidth management. The provided diagram will
serve as a platform for the following discussion.
1STMARDIV Comm Co
1st Marine Regiment

154 11th Marine Regiment
GPP04 GPP01
512 Kbps 512 Kbps
154 154
GPP02 GPP03
512 Kbps 512 Kbps
154 154
5th Marine Regiment 7th Marine Regiment
11
Service IDs. Service Identification Numbers are used to identify
communication channels being used within the MILSTAR system. Each unit
is allotted a specific number of Service IDs indicating resources
available for use, and these IDs are managed by that unit’s TCPEO. It is
the TCPEO’s responsibility to allocate and manage the Service IDs
depending on network requirements.
The diagram provided in this handout is an example of a Dual Simplex
MDR network which is a typical SMART-T topology used in Marine Corps
networks. A total of (8) service IDs are required to establish full
duplex communication for user traffic and in addition, 1 extra Service
ID is required for orderwire traffic.
Terminal IDs. Terminal Identification Numbers are used to define SMART-

T terminals roles within a network. When the MILSTAR plan is created by
an 0620, it is created with a limited number of terminals in mind. Each
terminal in the plan is assigned a unique Terminal ID. These Terminal
IDs can actually be assigned to any SMART-T, however, only one SMART-T
can use a Terminal ID per plan. In other words, two SMART-Ts cannot use
the same Terminal ID at the same time.
User Roles. Within the SMART-T network, there are two roles that can be
assigned to specific terminals (these are assigned via Terminal ID
number). They are the Communications Controller (CC) and the Antenna
Controller (AC).
The Communications Controller serves the following functions:
1. Can change payload network configurations and parameters.

2. Establish network services; management; access and control
functions.
3. Maintain control of network members by adding/deleting a beam
to/from the service.
4. Control network parameters; ensure efficient use of resources.
5. Provides network support and problem resolution; receives and
processes outage reports; sends reports to user communication
staff (Division/Corps/RSSC/CINC&MSOC).
6. Disseminate resources ceiling and service configuration to
alternate CC.
7. Transfer control to alternate CC.
8. Terminate network services.
The MILSTAR spot beam controlling authority will normally be the

COCOM communications planning staff and the Regional SATCOM Support
Center (RSSC). Upon approval of Satellite Access Authorization (SAA) the
COCOM/RSSC will authorize the SMART-T Antenna Controller (AC) to control
the spot beam at the designated mission access time. In addition, the
Satellite Access Authorization (SAA) will identify the alternate SMART-
T AC to control the beam.
The Antenna Controller can perform the following:
1. Gains control of spot beam.

2. Points antenna spot beam.
12
3. Transfer control to the alternate SMART-T AC.
4. Release control of the spot beam.
It is good practice to assign alternate CC/AC for each MILSTAR

mission. This provides increased flexibility within the network in the
case where the primary CC/AC has to move locations or is unable to
perform its complete function.
Bandwidth Management. When planning for a SMART-T network you must not
exceed the maximum uplink carrying capacity of 2240 Kbps. Remember
that there are (4) DTG, CX-11230 ports available for use. This is your
limitation with how many DTGs you can setup per SMART-T.
Refer to the following chart for specific port data rate
assignments:
Milstar Data Rates

Data Rate LDR MDR
75 X
150 X
300 X
600 X
1,200 X
2,400 X
4,800 X
9,600 X
19,200 X
16,000 X
32,000 X
64,000 X
128,000 X
256,000 X
512,000 X
1,024,000 X
Data Rates (bps)
In the previously provided SMART-T topology, the SMART-T located

at the Communications Company site has already allocated all (4) DTG
ports. However, at the subordinate sites, there are still resources
available for lateral links between sites pending the availability of
resources on the satellite and the availability of Service IDs.
General Planning requirements. When planning for a SMART-T network, it

is imperative to coordinate with a Tactical Communications Planning and
Engineering Officer (TCPEO) – who normally resides at the MSE G-6 or
within the Communications Company/Battalion/Squadron.
Site Survey/Selection. It is important to note that the SMART-T antenna

has a tilt angle of 10-degrees. This may not pose a problem on level,
flat terrain, but depending on terrain slope or the presence of hills,
could present an issue if appropriate terrain considerations
13
are not identified early. The SMART-T also requires an unobstructed view
of the sky; obstructions such as buildings and trees should be avoided
when selecting an appropriate site for the terminal.
Environmental Factors. The SMART-T does experience significant signal

path loss due to some environmental conditions. Rain attenuation requires
substantial attention because the size of a raindrop closely approximates
signal wavelength at 44 GHz. The signal can also attenuate due to
snowfall. Dry snow will have little effect (if any) on the signal,
however, wet snow can negatively impact your RF signal.
The terminal is designed to operate in austere conditions, however
there are limits to employment in extreme climates. The SMART- T should
only be operated in temperatures from -24 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
Power Requirements. Power is distributed to the SMART-T by the Power

Distribution Unit (PDU) using either the Prime, External DC source, or
External AC power source. The onboard generator provides the prime power
of +28VDC to SMART-T. External DC power can be used from either the HMMWV
which comes with the system or another external DC source. An external
DC power source cable from the PDU to the HMMWV slave receptacle enables
rapid power transition from the generator to the HMMWV during power
failures. AC power is provided using any standard 110/220 VAC power
generation system and connecting an AC cable from the pallet connector
to an external AC source. In addition, 12-volt batteries provide backup
battery power for the terminal. The backup batteries provide up to ONE
minute of terminal operation during power interruptions, and 30 days of
stored data retention (assuming batteries are fully charged) while the
SMART-T is non-operational. The SMART-T should be connected to two
active power sources. If there is a power failure and the SMART-T is not
operating on UPS power, the result will be a loss of keys and the
database.
ADVANCED EHF UPGRADE
The AN/TSC-154A Advanced EHF (AEHF) upgrade, together with the AN/PYQ-
19 Tactical Computer Digital Mission Planner will enable SMART-Ts to
communicate over new AEHF satellites at up to 8 Mbps.
SUMMARY
The SMART-T deploys in support of the Marine Expeditionary Force

(MEF), Ground Combat Element (GCE) (Marine Division (MARDIV), Regiment,
and Marine Expeditionary Brigade (MEB) / Marine Expeditionary Unit
(MEU) nodes, but may be deployed to support any unit/task force at the
commander’s discretion. It provides the USMC Operational Forces with a
protected satellite communications entry point into the MILSTAR portion
of the Global Information Grid (GIG) to pass information appropriate to
satisfy the current situational requirement.
14
PLANNING SCENARIO
You are the S-6A for RCT-7 and are required to tie in the units
depicted below. Each line with a distance annotated is required to have
an RF link. You have (6) MRC-142Cs and (4) TSC-154 SMART-Ts to form your
RF architecture. Also, you have 2 links to higher (not depicted) that
are already planned (you have already dedicated equipment for these
links). Develop a MCR Radio Diagram for your RF architecture (ensure you
include SLDs and date rates for each link).
- What is preferred…a MRC-142C link or a SMART-T link?

- What are the distance limitations of the MRC-142C?
- How many DTGs can the SMART-T support?
- What bandwidth can the DTGs on the SMART-T support?
- Do you have any room for future growth?
REFERENCES
1. MCWP 3-40.3 (Communications and Information Systems)

2. CJCSM 6231 Series (Manuals for Joint Tactical Communications)
3. Newton’s Telecom Dictionary (23rd Edition)
4. TM 11-5895-1612-12–AN/TSC-154 Operator/Maintainer Manual
5. AN/TSC-154 SMART-T Workbook
6. MCI SMART-T Handbook
7. MARCORSYSCOM SMART-T Factsheet
15
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
AN/TRC-170 TROPOSPHERIC SCATTER MICROWAVE RADIO TERMINAL
ECC E11
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED
1. Without the aid of reference, define in writing the frequency

range of the AN/TRC-170A (V5) per TM 08658A-14/1A (0602-PLAN-1103dj).

data rate of the AN/TRC-170A (V5) per TM 08658A-OI/1 (0602-PLAN-
1103dk).
3. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the three

(3) propagation modes of the AN/TRC-170A (V5) per the AN/TRC-170 (V)5
Quick Reference Handbook (0602-PLAN-1103dl).

appropriate multichannel radio symbol for the AN/TRC-170A (V5) in
1103lr).
5. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the antenna

diversity mode in which the AN/TRC-170A (V5) operates per TM 08658A-
14/1A (0602-PLAN-1103dm).
2
INTRODUCTION
Troposcatter systems were developed in the 1950’s for point-to-

point communications beyond line of sight between remote geographic areas
where standard line of sight microwave and cable links were not feasible.
Early tropospheric scatter communications systems provided
militaries much needed high capacity wireless links supporting voice and
data, over long distances without the need for intermediate repeaters.
These systems were characterized by the use of very high power amplifiers
and very large antennas which were cumbersome to deploy in their
transportable configuration. Due to the required high transmitted power,
the tropospheric scatter systems of the time caused a concern about
interference with other communications networks; so detailed frequency
planning was necessary if it was to be used in larger networks.
As a result of recent experience, military forces are re-
discovering the benefits of troposcatter communications for long range,
beyond line of sight links. Satellite bandwidth for tactical use or
home nation reach-back is very limited and is becoming cost prohibitive.
Troposcatter communications are able to provide networked multimedia
services with attractive data rates that are quick to deploy and
relatively easy to operate.
The AN/TRC-170 family of tactical troposcatter (TROPO) radio
terminals [AN/TRC-170(V2/3/5)] provides digital trunking between major
nodes. The AN/TRC-170 is a transportable, self-enclosed troposcatter
terminal (multichannel) capable of transmitting and receiving digital
data over varying distances (up to 100 miles). This terminal is comprised
of modular electronic equipment including legacy TRI-TAC multiplexers
and cryptographic items all housed in a modified S-250/G shelter.
BASIC TROPOSPHERIC SCATTER COMMUNICATIONS THEORY
The Earth’s atmosphere is comprised

of five principal layers; troposphere,
stratosphere, mesosphere, thermosphere,
and exosphere. Each layer of the
atmosphere affects communication signals
differently.
The troposphere (derived from the
Greek word tropein, which means to turn or
change) is the lowest, most dense layer of
the atmosphere and extends from the
Earth’s surface to an average of 10 km. As
you increase height in this layer the
temperature drops from 17 degrees to
-52 degrees Celsius. Additionally, this
is where most of the weather takes place.
The tropopause separates the troposphere
from the next layer of the Earth’s
3
atmosphere. The troposphere and tropopause together are known as the
lower atmosphere.
With today’s technologies, we are able to predict many conditions
in the troposphere and use this natural medium to transmit and receive
microwave energy. Tropospheric scatter is one method of propagating
(transmitting) microwave energy beyond line of sight (BLOS) or over the
horizon. It takes advantage of the refraction and reflection phenomena
in the troposphere. Microwave signals are scattered in such a way as
to allow reliable communications on hops up to 640 km (400 miles). The
Department of Defense uses smaller mobile communication systems to
provide battlefield communications with much shorter effective ranges.
There are a number of theories explaining tropospheric scatter
communications ending with a small fraction of the transmitted radio
energy being diverted towards a receiving station. One theory is that
the diversion is caused by atmospheric air turbulence, irregularities in
the refractive index, or similar rapid change in the meteorological
elements. This theory accounts for the scattering of radio energy like
fog or moisture seems to scatter headlights on a dark night. Another
theory is that the air is stratified into discrete layers of varying
thickness in the troposphere. The boundaries between these layers become
partially reflecting surfaces for radio waves and thereby scatter the
waves downward over the horizon.
Simply put, tropospheric scatter is a method of propagation that
uses the transmitting and receiving microwave radio signals over
considerable distances. This method of propagation uses the tropospheric
scatter phenomenon, where radio waves at particular frequencies are
randomly scattered as they pass through the upper layers of the
troposphere. Radio signals are transmitted in a tight beam aimed at the
tropopause, midway between the transmitter and receiver sites; as the
signals pass through the troposphere they are scattered, allowing the
receiver station to pick up the signal.
Regardless of the theory you choose to accept, it is undeniable
that reliable, effective communications are established using this
method. Tropospheric scatter or troposcatter is the most common of three
methods of employment of the AN/TRC-170A(V5) in the United States Marine
Corps (to be discussed later).
AN/TRC-170A SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The AN/TRC-170A is a full duplex, point-to-point mobile radio set

operating in the 4.4-5.0 GHz frequency range that provides line of sight
(LOS) and beyond line of sight (BLOS) connectivity to provide digital
communications services between
major nodes up to 100 miles without the
standard delay of a satellite communications
link.
Link quality and range are dependent on
several factors to include transmission data
rate, allowable error rate, path geometry
(distance, horizon angles, terrain,
4
obstacles, etc.), atmospheric conditions (climatic, seasonal, and daily
variations), and required service availability. Each factor has a
significant effect on performance, and each link should be engineered
to ensure satisfactory service. The transmission data rate, modes of
operation, and timing considerations are discussed below.
Transmission Data Rates. The AN/TRC-170A(V5) can provide communications

services at the following data rates:
The difference between the data rates with or without the Turbo
Product Code (TPC) Forward Error Correction (FEC) is due to the coding
scheme employed in the Tropo Modem (TM). For planning and testing
purposes, the maximum data rate of the AN/TRC-170 (V5) is 16,384 Kbps.
At lower data rates, higher path losses and wider multipath can be
accommodated.
Modes of Operation. The AN/TRC-170A (V5) can be operated in one of three

modes with various ranges achievable in each mode. The modes are line-
of-sight, troposcatter, and obstacle gain diffraction. Each mode is
useful under certain circumstances and in various environmental
conditions. The extensive capabilities and flexibility of this system
make it an invaluable transmission system and workhorse that provides
connectivity between Major Subordinate Commands (MSCs) and the Command
Element (CE) to the Marine Expeditionary Force (MEF).
Line-of-Sight Mode. This requires minimal power output (0.5 watts) and
requires straight-line clearance between sites. Ranges up to 35 miles
are possible but line-of-sight mode is typically not used for distances
greater than 10 miles.
Troposcatter Mode. With troposcatter, a small portion of the transmitted

radio wave is refracted off the troposphere toward the
5
distant-end AN/TRC-170. Ranges up to 150 miles are possible (in theory)
in troposcatter mode but typical troposcatter shots are 40 to
100 miles with the power set to 1500 watts. This is the most common mode
utilized in the USMC.
Obstacle Gain Diffraction Mode. Radio waves are diffracted off the
obstacle toward the distant-end AN/TRC-170. Ranges up to 100 miles are
possible but typical OGD shots are 10 to 40 miles. This mode is used
when there is an obstacle (e.g. a mountain) located between the sites.
AN/TRC-170A SYSTEM COMPONENTS
AN/TRC-170(V5) Baseband Configuration. The baseband equipment within the

AN/TRC-170(V5) provides three functions: multiplexing, signal
conditioning, and encryption. The baseband equipment suite includes the
CS-6716 modem which is an upgrade replacement for the legacy MD- 1026
modem. With this upgrade, the AN/TRC-170(V5) has increased throughput of
up to 16,384 Kbps. In addition, recent upgrades to the baseband
configuration have added the following capabilities:
1. Turbo Product Code (TPC) Forward Error Correction (FEC) that

sends redundant bits along with user bits in order to provide a type of
error correction on transmitting information.
2. Adaptive Link Power Control (ALPC) feature that can

automatically adjust power to account for a low Receive Signal Level
(RSL).
3. Remote monitoring and configuration capability.
High Power Amplifier (HPA) - Klystron. The AN/TRC-170 HPA’s power output
is based on the system’s propagation modes. The AN/TRC-170 HPA
6
operates in the following three modes: line-of-sight (LOS), LO TROPO,
and HI TROPO.
1. LOS mode uses only the TRC-170's up-converter to generate the

Radio Frequency (RF) output power. The TRC-170 will put out 0.5 watts
of power to the antenna. This mode is recommended to be used when both
radios are separated less than 35 miles apart and there are no obstacles
between the antennas.
2. LO TROPO is used when the TRC-170's Klystron is used to generate

RF power levels between 0 - 800 watts. This mode is recommended when the
power level required to establish communications is less than 800 watts.
3. HI TROPO is used when the TRC-170's Klystron is used to generate
RF power levels between 800 - 1,500 watts. This mode is recommended when
the power level required to establish communications is more than 800
watts.
OE-468/TRC Microwave Antenna System (QRC-3). All-aluminum, 8-foot

diameter parabolic reflector antenna mounted on a collapsible tripod. It
is designed to radiate and receive microwave energy as part of a line-
of-sight or troposcatter communications system operating in the
4.4 – 5.0 GHz frequency range.
This compact, lightweight and
rugged antenna can operate in winds
up to 80 MPH and survive winds up
to 120 MPH. Each antenna is packed
in a lightweight transit frame and
can be rapidly assembled or
disassembled by two trained
operators in less than 15 minutes.
Its compact design allows the OE-
486/TRC Microwave Antenna System to
be transported by the modified M116A2 trailer or other conventional
flatbed trailers in operational environments.
The primary difference between the Air Force/Army TRC-170 variants
and the Marine Corps V5 is the antenna group. The OE-468 is the obsolete
GRC-201 system’s antennas. When the GRC-201 was replaced by the TRC-170,
the USMC kept the OE-468. All TRC-170 variants are interchangeable with
the exception of the antenna systems.
7
DOCUMENTATION
The AN/TRC-170 is depicted in multichannel radio diagrams via the

below symbol:
TZL01
16384 Kbps
170 170 170
AN/TRC-170 AN/TRC-170 Link
Antenna Hazard Zone. The AN/TRC-170 radiates high power microwave energy
that can cause serious injury or death. Care must be taken to keep
personnel out of the antenna radiation path. The figure below shows the
radiation hazard zone in front of the AN/TRC-170 antennas at 1000 watts.
These hazard zones should be marked and identified in order to prevent
injury to personnel when the AN/TRC-170 is operational.
7.75 FEET
HAZARD
6-MINUTE ZONE
ZONE
5.25 FEET 290 FEET

950 FEET
GROUND
Frequency Allocation. The AN/TRC-170 (V2) is only interoperable with the

AN/TRC-170 (V3) and the AN/TRC-170 (V5) in the dual (space) diversity
mode of operation. Space diversity is achievable by separating antennas
by at least 100 wavelengths (20.9 ft at 4.7 GHz). Frequency diversity
for the AN/TRC-170 (V5) is achieved by separating the transmit
frequencies by at least 100MHz.
As previously mentioned, the AN/TRC-170 (V5) operates in the 4.4
to 5.0 GHz frequency range. Transmit and receive frequencies in the
AN/TRC-170 (V5) are adjustable in 100 kHz increments. Considerations in
making frequency assignments are:
1. AN/TRC-170 frequencies. Frequencies must be tunable by the

AN/TRC-170.
2. Dual Diversity. Dual diversity requires two separated by at
least 100 MHz for each radio link (one transmit frequency and one receive
frequency).
8
Dual Space Diversity – both antennas receive and only one transmits.
This provides double the receive antenna surface in order to pick up
the incoming signal.
REFERENCES

4. Technical Manual for the Digital Tropo Modem Upgrade for the
AN/TRC-170 (V3/V5) Terminal 2900
5. AN/TRC-170(V)5 Quick Reference Handbook
6. TM 08658A-14/1 Operator’s Manual for the AN/TRC-170
7. TM 09280A15&P/1 OE-468/TRC Antenna
8. TM 08658A-24P2 (AN TRC-170(V)3, 3A, & 5)
9. Introduction to Troposcatter Communications (Whitepaper). COMTECH
Systems, Inc.
9
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
WIRELESS POINT-TO-POINT LINK VERSION D (WPPL-D)
ECC E12
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED
1. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the two (2)
operational modes in which the WPPL-D can extend a Local Area Network
(LAN) to remote sites per Wireless Point-to-Point Link Version D (AN/TSC-
178 V(3)) Document Number 55-001033-01 Version 2.5 (0602-PLAN-1103fi).
2. Without the aid of reference and given a type of WPPL-D

transceiver, identify in writing the frequency range of the given
transceiver per Wireless Point-to-Point Link Version D (AN/TSC-178 V(3))
Document Number 55-001033-01 Version 2.5 (0602-PLAN-1103fj).
3. Without the aid of reference, identify the maximum data rate of

the WPPL-D per Wireless Point-to-Point Link Version D (AN/TSC-178 V(3))
Document Number 55-001033-01 Version 2.5 (0602-PLAN-1103fm).
4. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the appropriate

multichannel radio symbol for the WPPL-D per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF
Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1103mb).
2
INTRODUCTION
Originally, the WPPL was intended to be used as an additional

transmission system allowing Marines to extend the Very Small Aperture
Terminal (VSAT)/Support Wide Area Network Version D (SWAN-D) SATCOM Local
Area Networks (LANs) wirelessly to remote areas during Operation IRAQI
FREEDOM (OIF); however, Marines quickly saw the advantages of the WPPL over
other systems and used them much like the TSSR to extend large LANs wirelessly
where fiber cabling was not practical. Some examples of the WPPL
implementation were over flight lines, rivers, and paved roads and, where
feasible, WAN-like transport from camp to camp for all users.
WPPL-D: DESCRIPTION AND CHARACTERISTICS
The WPPL-D is capable of operating in both Point-to-Point (PTP) and

Point-to-Multipoint modes achieving Line-of-Sight (LOS) for extension of a
Local Area Network (LAN) to remote areas.
Data is exchanged between WPPL-D installations via radio frequency (RF)
transmission and reception that
establishes a two-way data link. The
Harris and Redline Ethernet Radios are
transceivers and IP modems-one physical
unit performs both transmit and receive
functions and are not compatible with
each other; however, both Harris and
Redline transceivers can transmit and
receive at the same time on the same
antenna mast since they operate at
different frequencies.
The WPPL network supports all
internet protocol (IP) services like
HTTP, FTP, TCP, VoIP, and UDP and
provides transmission security
(TRANSEC) through the Cisco 3825 NIPR
Integrated Services Router (ISR) using
IPSec Advanced Encryption Standard
(AES) 256-bit encryption. It also
provides communications security
(COMSEC) through the TACLANE KG-175D
Micro.
In addition to these capabilities, the WPPL-D system also supports
DSN/Long Local extension through the Foreign eXchange Station/Foreign
eXchange Office (FXS/FXO) ports that include Plain Old Telephone Service
(POTS) devices and DSN gateways through the T-1/E-1 ports.
3
WPPL-D: COMPONENTS
The WPPL-D system consists of the following components:
1. Harris Antenna (Subscriber and Sector)

2. Redline Antenna (Subscriber and Sector)
3. Harris Ethernet Radio
4. Redline Ethernet Radio
5. SIPR/NIPR routers (CISCO 3825 ISR)
6. KG-175D Micro variant
7. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Each of these components resides in either the outdoor unit (ODU) or

the indoor unit (IDU). Note that the IDU and ODU are connected through a
280ft Ethernet cable.
OUTDOOR UNIT (ODU)
The ODU consists of all of the equipment that resides outside when the
WPPL-D is deployed for operation. The Outdoor Unit (ODU) consists of the
following:
1. Antenna Systems
2. Ethernet Radio Systems
Antenna Systems. The WPPL-D is

supplied with four antennas per terminal.
1. Harris Subscriber antenna

2. Harris Sector Controller antenna
3. Redline Subscriber antenna
4. Redline Sector Controller antenna
The Redline and Harris antennas are each

designed to be operated with their respective
proprietary transceivers. Refer to the table
below for antenna technical specifications:
Antenna Mode Frequency Beamwidth

Harris Subscriber PTP 4.4-5.0 GHz 6 degrees
Harris Sector Controller PMP 4.4-5.0 GHz 60 degrees
Redline Subscriber PTP 5.470-5.725 GHz 4.5 degrees
Redline Sector Controller PMP 5.470-5.725 GHz 60 degrees
Note:
1. The Subscriber antenna can be utilized by both sites in Point-to-
Point network
4
2. The Subscriber antenna can also be utilized at spoke sites in a
Point-to-Multipoint network
3. The Sector antenna can be utilized at the hub site in a Point-to-

Multipoint network.
4. Refer to figures 1 and 2 for Point-to-Point and Point-to-

Multipoint diagrams.
In Point-to-Point network, only two WPPL-D terminals communicate with

one another across subscriber antennas. This maximizes bandwidth across the
link.
Subscriber Subscriber
Antenna Antenna
Antenna With AN-80i With AN-80i / Antenna
RF-7800W RF-7800W
SWAN SWAN
5
In a Point-to-Multipoint network, one WPPL-D terminal acts as a hub
using the Sector antenna and provides services to as many as 20 subscriber
terminals using Subscriber antennas. The data rate is split amongst the
subscribers, so the throughput depends on the number of subscriber stations
online. It is important to note that the WPPL-D is not interoperable with
previous versions.
Ethernet Radio Systems. The WPPL-D is supplied with two transceivers

per terminal (also called Ethernet Radios). These are the Redline AN-80i and
the Harris RF-7800w. Each operates in separate frequencies from one another.
While this prevents interoperability between the Redline and Harris systems,
it also serves to prevent interference between these two antennas sharing
the same antenna mast.
Ethernet Radio Frequency Data Rate Range PTP/PMP

Harris Broadband 4.4-5.0 GHz** 54 Mbps* 80km/25km
AN-80i Redline 5.470-5.725 GHz 54 Mbps* 50km/25km
Notes:
*The maximum data rate for a Harris RF-7800 radio is 90 Mbps and for an
AN-80i Redline is 80 Mbps. Firmware purchased by USMC limits both
Ethernet radios to 54 Mbps.
**This is the same frequency range of the AN/TRC-170.
6
AN-80i Redline Harris Broadband
Ethernet Radio Ethernet Radio
INDOOR UNIT (IDU)
The IDU consists of all of the equipment

that resides inside some type of shelter when
the WPPL-D is deployed for operation and
consists of the following transit cases:
1. Network Case
2. UPS Case
Network Case. The Network case consists

of the following components:
1. NIPR Integrated Services Router

(CISCO 3825)
2. SIPR Integrated Services Router
(CISCO 3825)
3. Maintenance & Control Laptop
4. KG-175D Micro TACLANE
NIPR/SIPR Integrated Services Router. The NIPR/SIPR routers are CISCO

Integrated Services Routers (ISRs) with a built in CISCO 3750 switch. Cisco
routers provide IP services, POTS, and VoIP capability. The NIPR ISR includes
a virtual private network (VPN) bundle to handle AES 256-bit encryption
(TRANSEC), freeing the processor for routing duties. The NIPR ISR also
provides black side routing capabilities while the SIPR ISR provides red
side routing capabilities.
7
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
NIPR/SIPR ISR w/ service modules
1. 24-port Network Module Enhancement (NME): a fully functioning

3750 switch that is physically part of the router, but logically a
completely separate unit with full-feature Internetwork Operating System
(IOS) and console interface. The switch is also Power over Ethernet (PoE)
enabled to allow powering of IP connections (i.e. – VoIP phones).
2. GE 1: Fiber Optic Gigabit connection for future expansion.
3. 4 each HWIC Connections: High Performance WAN Interface Card that

provides an EIA-530 interface (balanced serial interface/ 25 pin
connector).
4. Console: various console connections.
5. G 0/0 and G 0/1: provides gigabit Ethernet connections.
6. 2 each T1/E1 connections: provides interface for legacy switch

equipment.
7. 4 each FXS ports: provides connectivity for POTS phones.
Maintenance and Control (M&C) Configuration Laptop. The M&C laptop is

a standard Dell laptop that has the M&C software loaded on it. It provides
the operator with an interface to observe and manage the system. It will
also provide a console interface to the Harris Broadband and Redline AN-80i
Ethernet Radios and NIPR/SIPR ISRs.
KG-175D Micro TACLANE. The KG-175 Tactical Local Area Network Encryptor
(TACLANE) is a type 1 encryption device that supports the NSA High
Availability Internet Protocol Encryptor (HAIPE) Interoperability
Specification. It is a low cost, high speed, agile, in-line network
encryption device-meaning it is designed to integrate into an existing
network and facilitate the secure transfer of Internet Protocol packets
across Department of Defense networks (SIPR, NIPR, CENTRIX, and JWICS).
8
Essentially, the TACLANE serves as another layer 3 device on your
network, using standardized cabling and user assigned IP addressing,
providing Communications Security (COMSEC) for IP packet communications.
KG-175D Micro TACLANE
Universal Power Supply (UPS) Transit Case. The UPS case provides power
to the RF and the Network transit case equipment. This also provides the
equipment with a power backup in case of power failure. The UPS transit case
contains a power distribution unit (PDU) and the universal power supply
(UPS).
1. Power Distribution Unit (PDU). The PDU allows the users a power
source to connect tools and testing equipment during troubleshooting.
2. Universal Power Supply (UPS). The UPS provides conditioned and

backup power to the RF and network transit cases. The UPS operates on 120/240
VAC at 50/60 Hz, or 24 VDC from a military vehicle. The UPS has a power
rating of 2000 VA/1800 W. The battery life is expected to be 10 minutes with
a 1 KHz load. The UPS will also provide a surge protection up to 480
Joules. Below are the front panel controls and indicators of the UPS.
UPS Transit Case
Accessory Case. The Accessory Case contains the following items:
1. (12) CISCO IP Phones

2. (12) CISCO Phone Power Bricks
3. (4) POTS phones
4. (12) Blue CAT5 cables
5. (12) Black CAT5 cables
6. (12) Red CAT5 Cables
9
7. (1) 280ft Ethernet cable
8. (2) Lightning Arrestors
9. (2) CISCO Stackwise cables
10. (1) NATO Slave cable
11. (32) Misc phone cables
12. (1) Tool kit
WPPL-D: PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
Personnel. There is no specific MOS designed to operate the WPPL-D.

During the installation and tear-down of the WPPL-D, assistance will usually
be provided from other sections within the communications unit. For
operation, the WPPL-D is intended for the following MOSs based on function:
1. Radio Frequency (RF)- 0627/21/22

2. Data Networking (ISR and IP Modems)- 0651
3. Maintenance- 2844
Cross-training is essential with units that own a WPPL-D and it is

imperative to get a thorough knowledgebase within your platoon/section prior
to deploying forward. The Communication Training Centers (CTC) offer
additional courses on the WPPL-D system that can provide additional training
platforms for your Marines to attend. Remember, training and education is
essential in effectively employing this system.
Embarkation: Each WPPL-D terminal consists of 6 transit cases (9 if

spare equipment is included). The total weight is approx 850 lbs. Each
transit case was designed to be a two-man lift, reducing the number of
personnel required to assist with embarkation. Each terminal can be air-
lifted by a single CH-46, CH-53, or V-22. Ground transport can be accomplished
with the use of a high-back HMMWV, 7-ton utility truck, MRAP, or M-105
utility trailer. It is important to note that all of the transit cases for
the WPPL-D will not fit in a single up-armored HMMWV and that the antenna
mast case is too long to fit in any HMMWV.
Site Selection: Keeping in mind that the WPPL-D antennas are critical
LOS antennas, when selecting a site for the WPPL-D, attempt to utilize a
location that will provide LOS with the distant station. For the system
itself, a site survey should be completed prior to installation. As a
minimum you will need: location, height, azimuth, and elevation angle.
Also, consider cable lengths when selecting equipment locations. This
will serve to maximize the capability of the system while it is online. A
TEAMS can be utilized if necessary; however, keeping in mind that the limiting
factor is the length of the cable used to connect the IDU to the ODU.
10
If possible, select a location that has a slope of 10° or less, this
will prevent the masts from falling. Do not erect the mast when winds are in
excess of 35 MPH. Not only is this dangerous for the personnel setting up
the mast, but it can lead to the equipment being severely damaged as well.
Ensure that the installed position of the antennas will not point at
personnel, other communications systems, weapons systems, or munitions. Once
installed, establish a 2.4 meter safety zone around each active antenna.
This will prevent anyone from being harmed by the high concentration of RF
that immediately surrounds the antennas (remember the WPPL-D operates in the
microwave portion of the electromagnetic spectrum). This is especially
imperative if the WPPL-D antenna is installed on a roof-top where it can
easily be reached.
Frequency Requests: Frequency requests are typically due NLT 30-45 days
prior to the exercise or operation. You will need to contact your
organization’s Frequency Manager in order to receive the frequencies required
for training. Keep in mind the difference between the Harris antennas and
Redline antennas since they both operate in different portions of the
frequency spectrum.
Also consider what other transmission systems are operating in the
local area and other active transmissions that may intersect your own link.
This can severely hinder your ability to establish a channel capable of
transporting digital traffic.
Crypto (for KG-175D): The following are requirements for establishing

encryption via the KG-175D Micro TACLANE:
1. Firefly key (Dynamically generated TEK also called an

initializing vector)
Keys are distributed by the EKMS manager and both are loaded via a fill
transfer device (DTD or SKL). All KEYMAT must be received through your
Electronic Key Management System (EKMS) custodian.
11
DOCUMENTATION
a. Multichannel Radio. The WPPL-D will be depicted within multichannel

radio networks in the following fashion. The ## is a placeholder for the
unique terminal ID assigned to each WPPL-D:
WPPL WPPL
2X2 1X1
## ##
WPPL-D Subscriber Antenna WPPL-D Sector Antenna
Note: Refer to the WPPL data plate physically located on the system to
determine your terminal identification number.
WPPL WPPL
2X2 MZL01 2X2
54 Mbps
56 57
WPPL-D Link
You are authorized to separate your multichannel radio diagram into two
diagrams (terrestrial and satellite) if necessary to maintain neatness.
b. Packet Switching Networks. Each WPPL-D system was provided two Class
C networks (214.44.XX.0 for NIPR and 22.102.XX.0 for SIPR) to support IP
requirements. Note: In this instance XX denotes the WPPL terminal. When
establishing WAN connections, utilize IPs from the establishing terminal’s
IP allocation.
The WPPL-D (and any other instances for static tunnels) will be
depicted within packet switching networks in the following fashion:
NIPRPP01
I: 214.44.56.252 /31
3825 T: 10.0.0.0 /30 3825
WPPL 56 .252 .2 40 ms .1 .253 WPPL 57
SIPRPP01
I: 22.102.56.252 /31
3825 T: 10.0.0.0 /30 3825
WPPL 56 .252 .2 40 ms .1 .253 WPPL 57
KG-175
TACLANE
12
LINK AND CIRCUIT PRIORITY - RCT
LINK CIRCUIT
SLD CCSD XMIT SYS FROM TO TYPE RATE
PRIORITY PRIORITY
MPP01 LINK 54 Mbps 1
SIPRPP01 SIPRNET TUNNEL 1
NIPRPP01 WPPL RCT MAIN RCT TAC NIPRNET TUNNEL 2
BSPEPP01 BSPE 277 Kbps 3
ICT0PP01 VoIP 378 Kbps 4
MZP01 LINK 54 Mbps 2
SIPRZP01 SIPRNET TUNNEL 1
NIPRZP01 WPPL 1st MEB RCT MAIN NIPRNET TUNNEL 2
BSPEZP01 BSPE 277 Kbps 3
ICT0ZP01 VoIP 378 Kbps 4
MZP02 LINK 54 Mbps 3
SIPRZP02 SIPRNET TUNNEL 1
NIPRZP02 WPPL 1st MEB RCT TAC NIPRNET TUNNEL 2
MLP01 LINK 54 Mbps 4
SIPRLP01 SIPRNET TUNNEL 1
NIPRLP01 WPPL MAG-39 RCT MAIN NIPRNET TUNNEL 2
BSPELP01 BSPE 277 Kbps 3
ICT0LP01 VoIP 378 Kbps 4
MPF01 LINK 54 Mbps 5
SIPRPF01 SIPRNET TUNNEL 1
NIPRPF01 WPPL RCT TAC CLB-7 NIPRNET TUNNEL 2
BSPEPF01 BSPE 277 Kbps 3
ICT0PF01 VoIP 378 Kbps 4
SLD/CCSD Matrix Example
SUMMARY
In summary, a WPPL-D can provide an incredible wireless extension to

your network across a good distance. With the planning considerations given
in this class in mind, these systems can allow units to push away from a
large, main CP and still provide a large amount of bandwidth for Battalion
and Company services.
REFERENCES

2. CJCSM 6231 Series, Manual for Employing Joint Tactical Communications
5. WPPL-D Training Guide, Document Number 55-001033-01
13
14
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
VERY SMALL APERTURE TERMINAL (VSAT)/SUPPORT WIDE AREA NETWORK

VERSION D (SWAN-D)
ECC E13
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED

frequency band in which the VSAT/SWAN-D operates per TM 11517A/11523A-
OR (0602-PLAN-1103fc).

satellite carrier size of the SWAN-D (V1/V2) per TM 11517A/11523A-OR
(0602-PLAN-1103fd).

satellite access method utilized by the SWAN-D (V1/V2) per TM
11517A/11523A-OR (0602-PLAN-1103fe).
4. Without the aid of reference, define in writing the

importance of the Very Small Aperture Terminal-Large (VSAT-Large)
Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) capability, per TM
11517A/11523A-OR (0602-PLAN-1103ff).

importance of the Master Reference Terminal (MRT) suite within a
VSAT/SWAN-D Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) network architecture
per TM 11517A/11523A-OR (0602-PLAN-1103fg).

appropriate multichannel radio symbol for the VSAT/SWAN-D in
1103fh).
2
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Very Small Aperture Terminal (VSAT)/Support Wide Area Network

Version D (SWAN-D) is an on-the-pause (OTP) satellite communications
asset that provides Beyond Line of
Sight (BLOS) communications
capabilities within the MAGTF
communications infrastructure via
commercial Ku-Band satellites. This
system enables the transmission of
variable data rates depending on
satellite carrier size (maximum TDMA
carrier size 5 Msps – Mega Symbols per
Second; 2.5 Msps is most common), Forward
Error Correction, and modulation rate.
The Marine Corps has
purchased commercial bandwidth for dedicated military use in support of
tactical operations ensuring worldwide connectivity.
The SWAN-D consists of an integrated commercial off the shelf
(COTS) solution utilizing Very Small Aperture Terminals (VSATs)
and networking components housed in portable transit cases that
can be deployed by small teams of trained operators in thirty
(30) minutes or less (per the TM). As fielded, the SWAN-D provides
a complete communications solution (“plug-n- play”) for the support
of IP-based data communication.
The Marine Corps is in the process of transitioning the SWAN
Program of Record to VSAT. They are currently fielded in three
versions/variants:
Version Multiple Access Antenna Size Role

SWAN-D V1 TDMA 1.2M Spoke
SWAN-D V2 TDMA 1.8M Hub or Spoke
VSAT-Large FDMA/TDMA 2.4M Hub or Spoke
SWAN-D V1 will transition to become VSAT-Small. SWAN-D V2 will

transition to become VSAT-Medium.
SWAN-D V1/V2 terminals transmit and receive Time Division Multiple
Access (TDMA) signals. The VSAT-Large can transmit and receive both
TDMA and Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) signals.
Note: FDMA is required for Standard Tactical Entry Point (STEP) access.
STEP and TELEPORT sites are in the process of implementing a TDMA entry
capability. In addition, the Regional Hub Nodes (RHN), Army facilities,
provide TDMA support for Army Command Post Nodes (CPN) and Joint Network
Nodes (JNN). They can also support USMC SWAN- D terminals (on a space-
available basis).
3
For the remainder of this lesson, we are going to focus primarily
on the SWAN-D V1/V2.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The SWAN-D V1/V2 consists of an Outdoor Unit (ODU) and an Indoor Unit
(IDU).
1. Outdoor Unit. The V1 (1.2M antenna) and

V2 (1.8M antenna) ODU equipment is
comprised of a 303T Antenna Controller,
Tunable Low Noise Block (TLNB), Block Up
Converter (BUC)/Solid State Powered
Amplifier (SSPA), and feed.
a. V1 and V2 Transit Terminal

(Antenna). The V1/V2 antenna assemblies
each contain a parabolic reflector and an
automatic positioner. The reflector focuses
receive-signals from the satellite to the
receive port of the
feed. Moreover, it focuses transmit-signals from the transmit port of
the feed. The positioner moves the reflector to the proper position to
communicate with the satellite. Both antennas offer a transmit frequency
range of 13.75 to 14.50 GHz and a receive frequency range of
10.95 to 12.75 GHz.
b. 303T Antenna Controller (303T ACU).

The 303T ACU provides auto
acquisition/tracking of a given satellite.
c. Block Up Converter (BUC)/Solid State

Power Amplifier (SSPA). The BUC/SSPA provides
transmit amplification and converts L-band
frequencies from the Indoor Unit (IDU)
traversing the inter-facility (IFL) cable to
Ku-band for transmission to the satellite.
d. Tunable Low Noise Block (TLNB). The

TLNB provides complete Ku-band downlink
coverage (receive) and converts the Ku-band signal from transmission to
L-band frequency for transport over the IFL cable to the Indoor Unit
(IDU).
2. Indoor Unit. The SWAN-D (V1/V2) Indoor Unit (IDU) suite of equipment
consists of the SATCOM (RF) Case, Network (A1) Case, and the UPS (A2)
Case.
4
SATCOM (RF) Case. The SATCOM (RF) case contains a modem that converts
the data from the routers to a modulated signal and vice versa. The case
houses the following major components:
a. Linkway Satellite Modem. The Linkway Satellite Modem provides

the interface between the data network and the RF TDMA satellite. It is
a multi-carrier/multi-rate TDMA traffic modem capable of supporting
carrier sizes of 5 Msps, 2.5 Msps, 1.25 Msps, 625 Ksps, and 312 Ksps.
b. Frequency Reference System/Rack Mounted Reference (RMR). The

RMR provides the system with the required
10 MHz reference frequency. It will also
block the DC voltage on the Tx/Rx ports on
the Linkway modem. This prevents damage to
the SSPA and 303T ACU.
c. Monitor and Control (M&C) Laptop.

The M&C laptop is a standard Dell laptop
that has the M&C software loaded on it. It
provides the operator with an interface to
observe and manage the system. It also
provides a console interface to the Linkway
modem, NIPR/SIPR routers, and the IP
accelerators. It is designed for out- of-
band management only (not to gain access
to any network) to prevent breach of
security policy. The standard username is
admin; password is Swan123*.
d. Modular Power Supply Control Assembly. Controls 24VDC power to

the M&C Laptop, 303T, and 48VDC power to the SSPA/BUC from the two power
supplies installed underneath.
Network (A1) Case. The Network transit case provides the interface
between local user networks and the SWAN-D satellite system. The Network
Case consists of the following four (4) components:
a. NIPR Integrated Services Router (ISR)/SIPR Integrated Services

Router (ISR). The SWAN-D Network Case houses two Cisco 3825 Integrated
Services Routers that provide dynamic routing capability, transmission
security via IPSec encryption (NIPRNET), VoIP, and survivable remote
site telephony (SRST).
Each router houses an embedded, yet fully independent, 24-port
Power over Ethernet (PoE) Network Module Enhanced (NME) layer 3 Cisco
3750 switch. The NME supports the use of Stackwise ports which allow
multiple switches to be daisy-chained together to create an aggregated
switch (two 24-port switches stacked to create a functional single 48-
port switch). Additionally, the NME is capable of providing Gigabit
Ethernet and multi-mode fiber connectivity via the backplane.
5
b. KG-175 TACLANE. See ECC – G03: Network Encryption Part 2 for
details.
c. Turbo IP Accelerator. Provides Transmission Control Protocol

(TCP) acceleration to black side (NIPR router) and red side (SIPR router)
users. The IP Accelerator provides standards-based TCP performance
enhancement for satellite communications networks. TCP bottlenecks in an
impaired environment (high delay, high bit error rate, or both) are
minimized and interoperability with the TCP Sessions is maintained.
UPS (A2) Case. The Universal Power Supply (UPS) case provides power to
the RF and the Network transit case equipment. This will also provide
the equipment with a backup in case of power failure. The UPS has a power
rating 2000 VA/1800 W. The battery life is expected to be
10 minutes with a 1 kW load. The UPS will also provide a surge protection
up to 480 Joules.
VSAT/SWAN TDMA SATELLITE NETWORKS
As previously mentioned, the SWAN-D V1/V2 terminals only transmit

and receive Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Ku-Band satellite
signals. TDMA is a channel access method for shared medium (usually
radio) networks. Several users can share the same frequency channel by
dividing the signal into different timeslots. The users transmit in
rapid succession, each using their own timeslot, enabling multiple
stations to share the same transmission medium (e.g. radio frequency
channel).
In TDMA applications, the hub transmission system will be paired
with a Master Reference Terminal (MRT) suite which serves as the network
hub for control of the Linkway satellite network. SWAN-D network
operation requires that one, and only one, MRT be present and operating
in the system. The SWAN-D uses an MRT suite to control the timing of the
TDMA network so that data collisions do not occur or are, at least,
held to a minimum.
The MRT Case operates in conjunction with an Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS) in a separate deployable UPS transit case. The UPS provides
conditioning of power as well as standby power to the MRT Case in case
of power loss.
MRT Case. The following subparagraphs provide a description of the

MRT Case components.
6
The MRT Case components are installed in a standard 19-inch electronic
rack as shown in the figure. The MRT Case contains the (1) Master
Reference Terminal (MRT), (2) Alternate MRT (AMRT), (3) Keyboard- Video-
Mouse (KVM) drawer, (4) Network Management System (NMS) laptop computer,
(5) Ethernet
switch, (6) Network
Control Computer (NCC),
and the (7) Alternate NCC
(ANCC).
a. Master Reference
Terminal Modem. The
Linkway MRT and AMRT are
locally redundant, peer
Linkway satellite
communication modems that
provide TDMA satellite
modem functions for the
terminal. The MRT relays
NCC commands to the Traffic Terminals (TTs) in the TDMA network. It
transmits and receives timing, signaling, and control information to the
TTs. The MRT is NOT intended to transmit user traffic. The AMRT Linkway
modem is an identical MRT unit and serves as the backup unit to the MRT
Linkway modem. Transition between the two modems is transparent to the
network terminals. If the MRT Linkway fails, then the AMRT Linkway
seamlessly takes over.
b. Keyboard-Video-Mouse (KVM) Drawer. The Tripp-Lite data

processing terminal KVM drawer provides the operator access to the NCC,
ANCC, and the NMS laptop from a single console. The KVM includes a 15-
inch LCD Monitor, keyboard, and touchpad.
c. NMS Laptop. The NMS Laptop is a Dell industry-standard computer

that contains software and console connections to configure and monitor
the MRT. It provides a simple and easy interface to view the system
status. Rear panel connectors provide the Ethernet and USB connections
necessary for equipment monitoring and control. It is mounted on a slide-
out shelf for ease of access and storage. There are no user replaceable
or repairable components in the NMS Laptop, therefore, if a laptop fails,
replace it with a spare laptop.
d. Cisco 3560 Ethernet Switch. The Cisco Catalyst 3560-24PS

Ethernet Switch is used to interconnect the Linkway Satellite Modems,
V210 NCCs, and the NMS Laptop.
e. Network Control Computers. The NCC and ANCC are locally

redundant, peer computers that reside on the V210 Sun Fire Servers. The
Sun Fire V210 server is a commercial grade server in a 1U transit case
powered by AC power. The active NCC controls the entire Linkway
7
TDMA network via the MRT modem. The NCC stores network configuration
data, provides performance statistics, and manages system resources. It
also hosts the NMS web server. The active computer continuously pings
the redundant peer to verify its status. Upon failure, the redundant
peer (ANCC) will automatically take control. The standby alternate
synchronizes its database every 7 minutes.
UPS Case. The UPS Case is a ruggedized 5U rack-mount transit case and
provides power for the MRT Case when the MRT is in a stand-alone mode
of operation. The case contains a convenience outlet panel which provides
convenience outlets for tools and test equipment, and an Intellipower
UPS for conditioning of power as well as standby power in case of power
loss.
The UPS is capable of supplying 1800 watts of power and supports
a minimum of 10 minutes of backup time with 1 kW load for equipment
shutdown in case of power loss. When a switch to battery power occurs,
the UPS automatically sounds an alarm.
MRT Employment:
The MRT can reside within the equipment enclosure on a VSAT-Large trailer
or in a standalone transit case associated with the SWAN-D V2 equipment.
The ideal placement of the MRT in standalone mode is in a sheltered
environment, with the transit case placed on a floor or ground level.
Avoid ground clutter, electromagnetic radiators, low ground, and other
poor operational conditions. Other considerations when placing the
VSAT/SWAN-D into operation are the satellite antenna location and power
connections. Cable lengths for accessory equipment need to be considered
when installing VSATs/SWAN-Ds: power access should be within 6 feet, and
the MRT should also be located within 4 feet of the TT.
SWAN-D TO VSAT TRANSITION
As previously mentioned, the Marine Corps is in the process of

transitioning the SWAN Program of Record to the VSAT Program of Record.
This simply implies that the systems known as SWAN will no longer be
fielded with an assigned network package. Instead, MARCORSYSCOM will
issue DDS-M suites to support wide area network connectivity
requirements. The transition has already begun for the VSAT-Large.
Until the transition is complete, VSAT/SWAN-D systems will continue
to maintain its organic network package. Along with the network package,
MCNOSC has assigned each SWAN-D its own allotment of registered IP
addresses in the form of a Class C address space for both the SIPRNET
and the NIPRNET. It is expected that this allotment of IP addresses
will be absorbed by the MCNOSC and distributed on an as-needed basis
once the transition is complete. Until then, the numbering scheme for
each is:
8
a. SIPRNET: 22.101.XXX.0 (XXX = unique SWAN terminal number)
b. NIPRNET: 214.43.XXX.0 (XXX = unique SWAN terminal number)
Each VSAT/SWAN-D also has a pre-configured IP addressing template

saved on the desktop of the Monitor and Control Laptop for use when
configuring the SIPR and NIPR ISRs. It is recommended that you work with
your operators and the 0620/0650 in your unit while in the fleet to
determine the best IP addressing scheme to support your unit
requirements.
SWAN-D: PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
a. Personnel. There is no specific MOS which has been created to

operate the SWAN-D/VSAT. During the installation and tear-down of the
system, assistance will usually be provided from other sections within
the communications platoon/unit. For operation, the SWAN-D/VSAT is
intended for the following MOSs based on function:
(1) Radio Frequency (RF) and Master Reference Terminal

(MRT)- 0627/21
(2) Data Networking (ISR and IP Modems)- 0651
(3) Maintenance- 2844/46 (Heavily reliant on Field Service

Representative [FSR] support)
(4) VSAT-Large (generator, environmental control unit, and

trailer)-1142/1161/3521
Cross-training is essential with units that own a SWAN-D/VSAT and it is

imperative to get a thorough knowledge base within your platoon/section
prior to deploying forward.
b. Embarkation: Each VSAT/SWAN-D terminal consists of transit

cases with the number varying depending on what version is being
employed. Each transit case was designed to be two-man lift, reducing
the number of personnel required to assist with embarkation. Each
terminal can be air-lifted by a single CH-46, CH-53, or V-22. Ground
transport can be accomplished with the use of a high-back HMMWV, 7-ton
utility truck, MRAP, or M-105 utility trailer. It is important to note
that all of the transit cases for the SWAN-D will not fit in a single
up-armored HMMWV- it must be a high back HMMWV and even with this, room
is extremely tight.
9
c. Site Selection: Even though the VSAT/SWAN-D is a satellite
terminal, the same planning factors still apply when employing equipment
that is a critical LOS based system. As the planner, the site needs to
afford a clear line-of-sight to the satellite, where trees or buildings
do not obscure the view of sky. Avoid installation within 50-ft of power
lines.
Stable, level, firm terrain is also required and soil conditions
should be considered. Extremely soft soil or solid rock should be avoided
where possible. The proper leveling of the case, as well as the sinking
of grounding rods, will be affected by these conditions.
When setting up the SWAN–D (V1/V2), the antenna case must face
South in the Northern Hemisphere, and North in the Southern Hemisphere
depending on the direction of the satellite of interest. Also, the
antenna case must be on a stable base and ballast material must be made
available (rope and stakes, sandbags, etc.). Finally, the antenna case
must be placed within 100-ft of the IDU cases.
Some other considerations when selecting a site is to provide a
location that shelters the terminal from high winds. High winds can cause
the antenna to shift and the Receive Signal Strength Level (RSSL) to
drop. Also, a site that affords good drainage is ideal. Wet and/or
damp areas should be avoided.
d. Hazard Zone. The operation of the HPA above 50W may involve
hazards of exposure to radiated energy in front of the antenna. This
exposure could result in serious harm to personnel if proper safety
precautions are not taken. To protect any personnel from physical damage
a barrier should be put in place to prevent accidental entry to the
hazardous area.
To create a hazard zone measure 6 feet from the feed of the antenna
and perpendicular from that distance measure 3.5 feet on the left and
right for a total of 7 feet. One (1) RF warning sign or decal should
be placed on both sides of the antenna feed arm with a placard warning
personnel not to enter hazardous region while the system is radiating.
e. Boot Files. Boot files contain terminal Linkway modem

configuration information and are created at the hub site by the MRT
operator via the NCC and distributed to the spoke terminals. Boot files
contain satellite, network, and site configurations to include transmit
and receive center frequencies, satellite carrier information, TDMA
frame structure, terminal Site ID. Other various site configurations on
this file include power settings, Linkway IP used in
establishing/terminating the PVC, and terminal location in
Latitude/Longitude format.
f. Planning Time Factors: Planning time factors are comparable

to other Marine Corps satellite terminals. Coordinate with your G-6 for
submission timelines for SAR/GAR.
10
g. Cryptographic Material and Key Material (for KG-175D): The
following are required for encrypting SIPR traffic via the KG-175D
TACLANE.
(1) Firefly key (Dynamically generated TEK also called an

initializing vector)
(2) PPK (used for Secure Dynamic Discovery [SDD])
Both keys are distributed by the EKMS manager and both are loaded
via a fill transfer device (DTD or SKL). All KEYMAT needs to be received
through your Electronic Key Management System (EKMS) custodian.
Keep in mind that if you are receiving services directly from a
STEP/TELEPORT site, the current KEYMAT that your local EKMS manager has
on hand may be different from what is required. This is another critical
planning factor to consider.
DOCUMENTATION
a. Multichannel Radio. The VSAT/SWAN-D will be depicted within

multichannel radio networks in the following fashion:
The ## is a placeholder for the unique terminal ID assigned to each

VSAT/SWAN-D. As you can see above, the version of VSAT or SWAN being
used (V1/V2) is denoted by the notation of that system’s antenna size
(from left-to-right: SWAN V1, SWAN V2, and VSAT-L).
The system serving as the hub with the Master Reference Terminal
will appear as such (remember, there can only be one):
SWAN VSAT
1.8 2.4
Ku Ku
11
RLT-2
MEB OBJ A
11SNT770955
SWAN
YPP01 YPP03
1.8
2.5 Msps Ku 2.5 Msps
YPP02
2.5 Msps
SWAN SWAN SWAN

1.2 1.2 1.2
Ku Ku Ku
BLT 1/2 BLT 2/2 1/10

IVO Rainbow Canyon IVO Delta-T IVO MEB OBJ A
11SNU7363517664 11SNU8650008600 11SNT770955
You are authorized to separate your multichannel radio diagram into

two diagrams (terrestrial and satellite) if necessary to maintain
neatness.
b. Packet Switching Networks. We use DMVPN today with our

VSAT/SWAN-D networks. Planning a VSAT/SWAN-D network using DMVPN is
slightly different than with static tunnels. In a static tunnel
configuration, every tunnel is addressed as a /30 or /31 network. When
using DMVPN, all members of that DMVPN “cloud” are on the same layer 3
network. Therefore, they need to be addressed as such. Allocate IP
subnets to support each host (i.e. 5 terminals including the hub would
require a /29 subnet.
The VSAT/SWAN-D will be depicted within packet switching networks
in the following fashion:
12
3825
SWAN 184
SIPRNET
DMVPN Cloud
22.101.184.0/29
I I
.2 .3 .4
3825 3825 3825

SWAN 183 SWAN 186
BLT 1/2 1/10
IVO Rainbow Canyon IVO MEB OBJ A
11SNU7363517664 11SNT770955
3825
SWAN 184
.1
NIPRNET
DMVPN Cloud
214.43.184.0/29
.2 .3 .4
3825 3825 3825

BLT 1/2 SWAN 183 1/10
SWAN 186
IVO Rainbow Canyon IVO MEB OBJ A
11SNU7363517664 11SNT770955
It is recommended that you separate your DMVPN diagram from your

Packet Switching Wide Area Network diagrams to maintain neatness.
13
LINK AND CIRCUIT PRIORITY - RCT
LINK CIRCUIT
SLD CCSD XMIT SYS FROM TO TYPE RATE
PRIORITY PRIORITY
YPP01 LINK 2.5 Msps 1
SIPR SIPRNET DMVPN 1
NIPR WPPL RCT MAIN RCT TAC NIPRNET DMVPN 2
BSPEPP01 BSPE 277 Kbps 3
ICT0PP01 VoIP 378 Kbps 4
YZP01 LINK 2.5 Msps 2
NIPR WPPL 1st MEB RCT MAIN NIPRNET DMVPN 2
YZP02 LINK 2.5 Msps 3
NIPR WPPL 1st MEB RCT TAC NIPRNET DMVPN 2
YLP01 LINK 2.5 Msps 4
NIPR WPPL MAG-39 RCT MAIN NIPRNET DMVPN 2
BSPELP01 BSPE 277 Kbps 3
ICT0LP01 VoIP 378 Kbps 4
YPF01 LINK 2.5 Msps 5
NIPR WPPL RCT TAC CLB-7 NIPRNET DMVPN 2
BSPEPF01 BSPE 277 Kbps 3
ICT0PF01 VoIP 378 Kbps 4
SLD/CCSD Matrix Example
SUMMARY
As the network planner, you are directly responsible for completing

the initial coordination steps required to access the satellite, the
STEP/Teleport site, and receive authorization to connect to a live
network.
The Communication Training Centers (CTC) offer additional courses
on the SWAN-D/VSAT system which provide good training platforms for your
Marines. Remember, training and education are essential in effectively
employing this system.
The Very Small Aperture Terminal (VSAT)/Support Wide Area Network
Version D (SWAN-D) satellite systems use many different components to
establish and maintain network connectivity and transfer data over the
uplink and downlink. Understanding each component, its function, and how
they all interconnect will greatly aid your understanding of the
14
system as a whole and serve as a basis for understanding how to plan for
the installation, operation, and maintenance of the VSAT/SWAN-D
satellite terminal.
REFERENCES

2. CJCSM 6231 Series, Manuals for Employing Joint Tactical
Communications
4. TM-11517A/11523A-OR
15
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
MULTICHANNEL RADIO NETWORK DOCUMENTATION AND DIAGRAMS
ECC E14
10/1/2015
(a) PERFORMANCE-BASED

action, task organization, table of equipment, allocate multichannel
radio equipment to organic and subordinate units to satisfy the
commander's communications system requirements for command and control
and within a timeline provided by the commander, per MCWP 3-40.3
(MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1702b).

action, task organization, table of equipment, higher headquarters
Annex K and communication concept of support, develop coordinating
instructions for a Multichannel Radio (MCR) Network, within a timeline
provided by the commander which satisfies the commander's
communications system requirements for command and control, per MCWP
3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1106co).

action, task organization, table of equipment, higher headquarters
Annex K and communication concept of support, develop Multichannel
Radio (MCR) network tasks for subordinate communication agencies,
within a timeline provided by the commander which satisfies the
commander's communications system requirements for command and
control, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-
1106cu).

organization, table of equipment, higher headquarters Annex K, and
communication concept of support, develop a Multichannel Radio (MCR)
Network plan, within a timeline provided by the commander which
satisfies the commander's communications system requirements for
command and control, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System)
(0602-PLAN-1106u).

organization, table of equipment, higher headquarters Annex K and
communication concept of support, create a Multichannel Radio (MCR)
Network diagram complete with System Link Designators (SLDs), within a
timeline provided by the commander which satisfies the commander's
3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1106w).

organization, table of equipment, higher headquarters Annex K,
supervise the operation of a Multichannel Radio Network within a
timeline provided by the commander that satisfies the commanders
3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1103mp).
2
INTRODUCTION
Multichannel radio has its own unique documentation and diagramming

techniques that are standardized throughout the Marine Corps and the
joint forces to ensure universal understanding.
Your transmission backbone is the pipe through which all services
travel to and from the distant end. It is important that you properly
document and diagram this network architecture to effectively
communicate your plan to higher, adjacent, and subordinate elements.
APPENDIX 5: RADIO NETWORK PLAN
Detailed instructions governing the planning, installation,

operation, and maintenance of radio networks including single-channel
radio, multichannel radio, and satellite radio, is found in Appendix 5
of the Annex K to an Operation Plan (OPLAN), Operations Order (OPORD),
or exercise directive. Key components include tasks, coordinating
instructions, and tabs (diagrams and cut sheets).
Tasks. When developing a plan for a multichannel radio network,

Communications planners will always task their Marines first (platoon,
company, or battalion) and the subordinate communications agencies
within their chain of command. The following are a few examples of
multichannel radio tasks for 8th Communication Battalion:
1. Detach (1) AN/TSC-154 and team to 1st MARDIV for connectivity

with the MEF CE and adjacent units.
2. Detach (1) AN/MRC-142C and team to 1st MARDIV for

connectivity with the USS Blue Ridge and subordinate units.
3. Attach (1) AN/TRC-170 from 3rd MAW for connectivity to 3rd

MAW.
4. Terminate a 2048 Kbps SHF SATCOM MCR link (STZ01) with

Landstuhl STEP.
5. Establish a 2048 Kbps SHF LOS TROPO link (TZL01) with 3rd
MAW.
6. Establish an 8192 Kbps UHF LOS MCR link (MZP01) to RCT-7

(MAIN).
7. Serve as Systems Control and Technical Control for all I MEF

HQ controlled circuits.
Coordinating Instructions. The following are a few examples of

multichannel radio coordinating instructions:
3
1. All units will plan, install, operate, and maintain the radio
systems architecture in accordance with the references, tabs, and
exhibits to this appendix.
2. The I MEF architecture will employ a plesiochronous timing

network utilizing the Truetime GPS Stratum-1 clock.
3. All transmission systems will be slaved via cable side.
4. All radio nets will be encrypted.
5. All AN/TRC-170s will operate in QPSK.
6. The following SMART-T terminal IDs are available for 1st

MARDIV for planning considerations: 3537, 3538, 3539, 3541, 3542.
7. Any changes to radio systems, which affect connectivity, will

be cleared through the I MEF G-6 prior to execution.
Tabs. Tabs within the appendix provide amplifying guidance via

network diagrams and configurations. The following is a list of all Tabs
found within Appendix 5: Radio Network Plan:
TAB A: Radio Guard Chart

TAB B: HF Radio Network Diagram
TAB C: VHF Radio Network Diagram
TAB D: LOS Radio Network Diagram
TAB E: UHF (LOS) Multichannel Radio Network Diagram
TAB F: Gateway Access
TAB G: SHF (LOS) Multichannel Radio Network Diagram/Gateway Access
Authorization
TAB H: UHF SATCOM Radio Network Diagram
TAB I: UHF SATCOM MCR Network Diagram
TAB J: EHF SATCOM MCR Network Diagram
TAB K: EHF SATCOM Orderwire Network Diagram
TAB L: Satellite Access Request (US Military)
TAB M: Satellite Access Request (Commercial)
TAB N: Satellite Access Authorization (US Military)
TAB O: Satellite Access Authorization (Commercial)
While at ECC, you will not create individual diagrams per the tabs
previously listed. Instead, we will create one Multichannel Radio
Diagram that will encompass all multichannel radio systems that are
utilized within the network.
MULTICHANNEL RADIO NETWORK DIAGRAM
The Multichannel Radio Network Diagram is the overall graphical

illustration of the interaction between nodes via compatible
multichannel radio systems.
4
Multichannel Radio Network Diagrams must include the following
information:
1. Unit Names/Locations
2. Proper Symbol to Reflect Type of Multichannel Radio System

Utilized
3. System Link Designators (SLDs)
4. Viable Data Rates
LEGEND
STEP
LAN
STEP
LMST v1 TRC-170 BAH
PHOENIX MRC-142C
Multichannel Radio Network Diagram
5
REVIEW: CONSTRUCTING A SYSTEM LINK DESIGNATOR (SLD)
SLDs are used to number or identify communications systems links.

Figure 3, below, is graphically demonstrating a link or the connection
of two transmission systems. Specifically, the satellite terminal at II
MEF is connected to the satellite terminal at 2D MAW via a satellite.
This creates what is known as a link.
Transmission Link with SLD
The SLD consists of five of the eight characters discussed in

Figure 4. The final three are used to identify trunks or aggregates (to
be discussed later).
System Link Designator Breakdown
Every multi-channel radio and cable transmission link should be

assigned an SLD (see Figures 5 and 6).
6
First Character: System/Link Type
7
Second/Third Character: User Codes
As noted in Figure 3, the first SHF satellite transmission link

between II MEF (Z) and the ACE (L) is identified by the SLD SZL01.
SLD Examples:
MZL02 Second Microwave link, MEF to ACE.
TZP03 Third Troposcatter link, MEF to GCE.
KZZ05 Fifth Cable (coaxial) link, MEF to MEF.
8
MULTICHANNEL RADIO CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS
You will construct a concept of operations for multichannel radio

to depict start/end times, a short narrative (to include location of
repeater sites), end state, your priorities for link establishment, the
capabilities/limitations of your plan, and an assessment of risks
associated with your plan. It is important that you spend time on the
creation of your CONOPS as it will be one of the few slides you actually
brief to your Commander. Note: It is an acceptable practice to combine
the multichannel radio and multiplexing CONOPS slide to assist in
briefing your Commander.
NARRATIVE: RCT communications architecture consisting of Multichannel Radio, Multiplexing, Packet

Switching, Telephony, and Single-Channel Radio established with MEB and subordinate elements in order to
enable command and control of RCT units. Repeater site established at 18STH854661.
END STATE: RCT communications architecture is installed and operational. RCT commander and staff have
access to the full range of planned voice, video, and data services with HHQ and subordinate maneuver units.
Repeater sites established, protected, and supported.
INSTALLATION PRIORITIES: IAW SLD/CCSD Matrix
CAPABILITIES: Connectivity with MEB and subordinate units providing secure path for the exchange of
voice, video, and data information. Planned services include:
SIPRNET: NIPRNET: Telephony:
•Email •Email •DSN and long distance calling (secure and non-
•Web •Internet secure)
•Chat •Chat •Iridium satellite
•VTC
LIMITATIONS: Static positions are required to maintain connectivity. Extensive logistical support is required
IOT support the large equipment footprint.
RISKS: Systematic, time-intensive setup/tear-down of equipment. Single points of failure are inherent to
multichannel/multiplexing architecture.
RISK MITIGATION: Close coordination with S-3 and S-4 to ensure that the S-6 is prepared to move when
required. Redundancy will be maintained where possible. Single-channel radio serves as alternate means of
communication.
Multichannel Radio Concept of Operations
REFERENCES

3. MCWP 5-1, Marine Corps Planning Process
9
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
COMMUNICATION CONTROL
ECC E19
10/1/2015
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED

Communications Control (COMMCON), per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications
System) (0602-MNGT-1701ak).
2. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the three

functional areas comprising Communications Control (COMMCON), per MCWP
3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1701al).
3. Without the aid of reference, identify in writing the primary

function of each of the three functional areas comprising Communications
Control (COMMCON), per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-
MNGT-1701bi).
2
COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL (COMMCON)
Understanding the relationship between communications and command

and control makes it clear that the network is indispensable to those
who require it to accomplish the mission. As the United States continues
to adapt to the Information Age, the trend of increasingly relying upon
a communications network will endure. In many respects, the Marine Corps
can no longer satisfactorily conduct military operations and achieve
desired effects without the ability to rapidly and reliably exchange
information. It falls on communicators to create and sustain the
network despite the dynamic nature of the battlespace and the vexing
circumstances within it.
Besides the effects of enemy action and equipment failure, there
are many challenges that shape how the network is created and sustained.
First, the overriding importance of the network in enabling command
and control raises visibility of the presence and status of the network.
When the network is degraded, it may detrimentally impact combat
operations and expose the force to vulnerability. Consequently, its
proper function becomes a concern not just for communicators but for
the commander, his staff, and the Marines who rely upon it. Second, the
pressure to provide a reliable, adaptable network based on frequently
unarticulated requirements engenders an atmosphere of confusion.
Uncertainty in a competitive environment is amplified by the need to
satisfy elusive, yet essential requirements. Third, limited resources to
satisfy both known and unknown requirements create tension between ends
and means. The ends, at times, appear endless, while the means, as
always, are finite.
Both communicators and those who are supported face these and
similar challenges: they are emblematic of the different factors and
conditions that confound command and control in the broadest sense.
Recognizing this, it follows that efforts to create and sustain a network
are susceptible to the same kinds of philosophies, processes, and
procedures that define command and control in an expeditionary maneuver
warfare environment. The same command and control doctrine articulated
in MCDP 6 applies to communications just as easily as it does to fires,
aircraft, or maneuvering units.
There are unique circumstances associated with communications that
create tension when applying mission command and control to creating and
sustaining a network. A network, by definition, is the interconnected
arrangement of different systems. These interrelationships call for
careful coordination, exacting attention to detail, and direction that
can require high degrees of specificity. Like any complex system, the
dynamic interactions of its various parts may create chaotic, seemingly
uncontrollable conditions that can cascade and reverberate throughout
the force. A virus, downloaded on a single computer on a data network,
can quickly multiply and infect the entire network. An incorrectly
performed changeover of a COMSEC key can eliminate a unit’s ability to
communicate on a pivotal single- channel radio net. The loss of a
generator supporting a satellite terminal can isolate a unit from
external connectivity. An equipment setting configured incorrectly can
deactivate a redundant link that provides a key information pathway for
a unit once or twice removed.
3
Communications cannot be viewed in isolation, as conditions
affecting it in one part of the battlespace influence conditions that
affect it elsewhere. Both physical and electronic interactions make
communications susceptible to even the most minor problems. Priorities
must be set in the type and volume of voice or data passed over networks
to ensure that networks do not become taxed beyond their capabilities.
Communications Control (COMMCON) represents command and control of
the network. The COMMCON process controls, through decentralized
execution, the organization, direction, coordination, planning, and
employment of communications resources in order to plan, install,
operate, and maintain a communications network responsive to MAGTF
operational requirements. While COMMCON is the delegated authority of
the G-6/S-6, communications is a function of command and overall
responsibility is retained by the commander. The COMMCON process, then,
is reflective of command requirements at each level of the chain of
command.
There are three functional areas comprising COMMCON: systems
planning and engineering (SPE), operational systems control (SYSCON),
and technical control (TECHCON). In a deployed environment, COMMCON is
exerted through the arrangement of communications units and agencies
throughout the chain of command to ensure MAGTF communication commonality
and fulfillment of functional responsibilities. The MAGTF or major
subordinate command (MSC) communications control center (xCCC
– x substituted for appropriate designator: M - MAGTF, D - Division,
etc. For the purpose of this period of instruction, MCCC will be used.)
represents the communications planning focal point for a MAGTF and its
MSCs. Meanwhile, SYSCON centers and TECHCON facilities implement plans
and orders and manage the day-to-day functioning of communications
networks.
COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL AGENCIES
1. Systems Planning and Engineering and MCCC. A MAGTF or MSC G-6

exercises COMMCON through the MCCC and is responsible for providing
operational communication support to the MAGTF or MSC commander and
directing subordinate MCCCs (see Figure 1). Systems planning and
engineering is the primary function of the MCCC and involves current
4
and future operations as well as future plans in order to design,
implement, and responsively adjust communications networks to satisfy
operational requirements.
The MCCC and its systems planning and engineering cell, which is
normally staffed by both G-6 and supporting communications unit
personnel, designs, engineers, and adjusts aspects of the communications
network through promulgation of communications plans, orders, and
technical directives, and supervision of their execution.
Functions of the MCCC include:

– Continuously capturing operational requirements and
designing/modifying responsive communications networks that satisfy
them; maintaining visibility and situational awareness of the
operational communications network as well as the battlespace and
operational picture.
– Analyzing the performance of the communications network
– Developing and issuing communications plans, orders, and technical
directives that implement or adjust a communications network;
providing direction to the local SYSCON and subordinate MCCCs as
required.
– Conducting planning as part of operational planning teams
– Staffing a liaison element in the MAGTF or MSC combat operations
center (COC)
– Preparing, maintaining, collecting, and submitting reports from
local facilities and subordinate MCCCs to the higher MCCC
– Directing the implementation of communications control conditions
(upon order from the Commander via the G-3) such as RIVER CITY via
subordinate SYSCONs to prevent the leakage of sensitive information
such as details of an impending operation, mass casualties, VIP
movements, major force movements, etc.
– Producing and distributing the Information Systems Directory.
Communications Control Agency Relationships
5
2. Operational Systems Control (SYSCON). SYSCON represents current
operations and day-to-day management of the operational communications
network. The SYSCON center, which is normally staffed by supporting
communications unit personnel, serves as the focal point for information
regarding the health of the current network, maximizes the effectiveness
of communications resources to meet operational demands, and remedies
deficiencies and outages.
Functions of the SYSCON include:

– Maintain visibility and situational awareness of the operational
communications network by monitoring system performance, collecting
and analyzing traffic data and outage reports, conducting quality
checks and tests to gauge network viability, and maintaining
initiative and tempo.
– Receive direction from the MCCC and higher SYSCONs.
– Implement and supervise the execution of communications plans,
orders, and technical directives and provide direction to the local
TECHCON facility and the subordinate SYSCONs. Coordinate with
higher, adjacent, and subordinate SYSCONs as required.
– Coordinate actions for service restoration and, when required,
supervise emergency adjustments to the communications network.
– Prepare, maintain, and distribute information management products
related to the communications network, including information systems
directories, user operating instructions, and communications-
electronics operating instructions (CEOI).
– Prepare, maintain, collect, and submit reports from local facilities
and subordinate SYSCONs to the MCCC.
– Recommend corrective actions to the MCCC for network adjustments or
changes.
– Oversee the implementation of communications control conditions such
as RIVER CITY via the TECHCON per direction from the MCCC.
– Ensure network-wide compliance with applicable security directives.
3. Technical Control (TECHCON). The TECHCON element of COMMCON is

the means of exercising centralized, technical supervision and direction
of the installation, operation, and maintenance of communications links,
circuits, and systems. The TECHCON facility, which is normally staffed
by supporting communications unit personnel, ensures the integrity of
signal paths and reroutes or reconfigures portions of the communications
network to rapidly respond to operational requirements.
Functions of the TECHCON include:

– Conducting monitoring, performance testing, signal conditioning, and
circuit rerouting to improve and maintain circuit quality and preempt
circuit degradation.
– Activating, deactivating, and reconfiguring circuits, links, and
systems based on priorities established by and at the direction of
the SYSCON.
6
– Analyzing factors involving circuit, link, or system interruptions,
failures, and disturbances; recommending corrective actions to the
local SYSCON for network adjustments or changes.
– Implementing and supervising the execution of technical directives
and providing direction to local communications elements and
subordinate TECHCONs. Coordinating with higher, adjacent, and
subordinate TECHCONs as required.
– Directing troubleshooting efforts and coordinating employment of
trouble teams to isolate and remedy circuit, link, or system
problems.
– Preparing, maintaining, and submitting reports to the local SYSCON.
REFERENCES
7
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
SYSTEMS CONTROL
ECC E20
10/1/2015
1. Given a command's mission, operational conditions,

operational plans, communications systems architecture, and
commander's guidance, identify a command's multichannel channel radio
network circuit priorities to ensure that the commander's
communications system requirements for command and control during a
field exercise are satisfied, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications
System) (0602-MNGT-1701ac).

commander's guidance, supervise the operation of a command's circuit
switched network by maintaining positive control over installation
priorities to ensure that the commander's communications system
requirements for command and control during a field exercise are
satisfied, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-
1701ae).

commander's guidance, prioritize troubleshooting efforts of a
command's circuit switched network when a circuit outage occurs to
ensure that the commander's communications system requirements for
command and control during a field exercise are satisfied, per MCWP 3-
40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1701ag).

commander's guidance, supervise the operation of a command's packet
switched network by maintaining positive control over installation
priorities to ensure that the commander's communications system
1701ah).

command's packet switched network when a circuit outage occurs to
40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1701aj).

commander's guidance, adhere to a senior Operational Systems Control's
directives or policies to ensure that the commander's communications
system requirements for command and control during a field exercise
2
are satisfied, per CJCSM 6231.07D (Joint Network Management and
Control) (0602-MNGT-1701am).

commander's guidance, employ network monitoring tools to maintain
situational awareness of the command's communication architecture to
40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1701an).

commander's guidance, assess communication network metrics in order to
determine if the command's communication architecture must be modified
to ensure that the commander's communications system requirements for
40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1701ao).

commander's guidance, while serving as the Systems Control (SYSCON)
Watch Officer, lead a SYSCON meeting with subordinate sections or
units in order to develop or maintain situational awareness of the
current communication network status, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF
Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1701ap).

Watch Officer, request information from subordinate sections or units
in order to develop a SYSCON brief to convey current communication
network status to the commander, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications
System) (0602-MNGT-1701aq).

commander's guidance, direct the modification to a command's
communication network by using an Operational Directive (OpDir) to
40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1701ar).

Watch Officer, prepare a SYSCON brief in order to convey current
communication network status to the commander during a field exercise,
per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1701au).

3
Watch Officer, present a SYSCON brief in order to convey current
communication network status to the commander during a field exercise,
per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-MNGT-1701av).
14. Given a Tactical Decision Game Scenario with the Commander's

Approved Course of Action, command's mission, task organization, table
of equipment, updated commander's intent and planning guidance, review
the Operations Order for enemy electronic warfare capability to refine
affects on communication system employment within a timeline provided
by the commander, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-
PLAN-1102cc).

the Operations Order environmental conditions to refine affects on
communication system employment within a timeline provided by the
commander, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-
1102cd).

the Operations Order friendly forces for higher communication agency
capabilities within a timeline provided by the commander, per MCWP 3-
40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1102ce).

the Operations Order friendly forces for adjacent communication agency
capabilities within a timeline provided by the commander, per MCWP 3-
40.3 (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1102cf).

the Operations Order friendly forces for supporting communication
agency capabilities within a timeline provided by the commander, per
MCWP 3-40.3C (MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1102cg).

the Operations Order friendly forces to determine the unit's
responsible for establishing communication between friendly force
units within a timeline provided by the commander, per MCWP 3-40.3
(MAGTF Communications System) (0602-PLAN-1102ch).
4
REVIEW: FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMAND AND CONTROL
(MCDP 6 – Command and Control)
How Important is Command and Control?
No single activity in war is more important than command and

control. Command and control by itself will not drive home a single
attack against an enemy force. It will not destroy a single enemy target.
It will not affect a single emergency resupply. Yet none of these
essential warfighting activities, or any others, would be possible
without effective command and control.
With command and control, the countless activities a military force
must perform gain purpose and direction. Done well, command and control
adds to a military’s strength. Done poorly, it invites disaster, even
against a weaker enemy. Command and control helps commanders make the
most of what they have— people, information, material, and most
importantly, time.
In the broadest sense, command and control applies far beyond
military forces and military operations. Any system comprising multiple
interacting elements, from societies to sports teams, needs some form of
command and control. Simply put, command and control in some form or
another is essential to survival and success in any competitive or
cooperative enterprise. Command and control is a fundamental requirement
for life and growth, survival, and success for any system.
What is Command and Control?
Command and control is often thought of as a distinct and

specialized function— like logistics, intelligence, electronic warfare,
or administration. It has its own peculiar methods, considerations, and
vocabulary independent of other functions. But in fact, command and
control encompasses all military functions and operations, giving them
meaning and harmonizing them into a whole. Command and control is not
the business of specialists (unless we consider the commander a
specialist) because command and control is fundamentally the business of
the commander.
Command and control is the means by which a commander recognizes
what needs to be done and sees to it that appropriate actions are taken.
Sometimes this recognition takes the form of a conscious command
decision (as in deciding on a concept of operations). Sometimes it takes
the form of a pre-conditioned reaction— as in immediate-action drills,
practiced in advance so that a unit can execute them reflexively in a
moment of crisis. Sometimes it takes the form of a rules-based
procedure— as in the guiding of an aircraft on final approach. Some types
of command and control must occur so quickly and precisely that they can
be accomplished only by computers— such as the command and control of a
guided missile in flight. Other forms may require such a degree of
judgment and intuition that they can be performed only by skilled,
experienced people— as in devising tactics, operations, and strategies.
5
Sometimes command and control occurs concurrently with the action
being undertaken, in the form of real-time guidance or direction in
response to a changing situation. Sometimes it occurs beforehand and
even after. Planning, whether rapid/time-sensitive or deliberate, which
determines aims and objectives, develops concepts of operations,
allocates resources, and provides for necessary coordination, is an
important element of command and control. Furthermore, planning
increases knowledge and elevates situational awareness. Effective
training and education, which make it more likely that subordinates will
take the proper action in combat, establish command and control before
the fact. The immediate-action drill mentioned earlier, practiced
beforehand, provides command and control.
What is the Relationship between “Command” and “Control?”
The traditional view of command and control sees “command” and

“control” as operating in the same direction: from the top of the
organization toward the bottom. Commanders impose control on those under
their command; commanders are “in control” of their subordinates, and
subordinates are “under the control” of their commanders.
A different and more dynamic view of command and control which sees
command as the exercise of authority and control as feedback about the
effects of the action taken. The commander commands by deciding what
needs to be done and by directing or influencing the conduct of others.
Control
COMMANDER COMMANDER
takes the form of feedback, the
continuous flow of information
about the unfolding situation
COMMAND
COMMAND
CONTROL
CONTROL
returning to the commander, which
allows the commander to adjust
and modify command action as
needed. Feedback indicates the
difference between the goals and
the situation as it
exists. COMMANDER COMMANDER
Feedback may come from any
direction and in any form
A typical view of command and Command and control viewed
(intelligence about how the enemy control—command and control as reciprocal influence—
is reacting, information about seen as unidirectional command as initiation of action
and control as feedback
the status of subordinate
or adjacent units, or revised guidance from above based on developments).
Feedback is the mechanism that allows commanders to adapt to changing
circumstances— to exploit fleeting opportunities, respond to developing
problems, modify schemes, or redirect efforts. In this way, feedback
“controls” subsequent command action. In such a command and control
system, control is not strictly something that seniors impose on
subordinates; rather, the entire system comes “under control” based on
feedback about the changing situation.
Command and control is thus an interactive process involving all
the parts of the system and working in all directions. The result is a
mutually supporting system of give and take in which complementary
6
command and controlling forces interact to ensure that the force as a
while can adapt continuously to changing requirements.
Complexity in Command and Control
Military organizations and military evolutions are complex systems.

War is an even more complex phenomenon— a complex system interacting
with the enemy’s complex system in a fiercely competitive way. A complex
system is any system composed of multiple parts, each of which must act
individually according to its own circumstances and which, by so action,
changes the circumstances affecting all the other parts. A boxer bobbing
and weaving and trading punches with his opponent is a complex system.
A squad-sized combat patrol, changing formation as it moves across the
terrain and reacting to the enemy situation, is a complex situation. A
battle between two military forces is itself a complex situation.
Each individual part of a complex system may itself be a complex
system— as in the military, in which a company consists of several
platoons and a platoon comprises several squads— creating multiple levels
of complexity. But even if this is not so, even if each of the parts is
fairly simple in itself, the result of the interactions among the parts
is highly complicated, unpredictable, and even uncontrollable behavior.
Each part often affects other parts in ways that simply cannot be
anticipated, and it is from these unpredictable interactions that
complexity emerges. With a complex system it is usually extremely
difficult, if not impossible, to isolate individual causes and their
effects since the parts are all connected in a complex web. The behavior
of complex systems is frequently nonlinear which means that even
extremely small influences can have decisively large effects, or vice
versa. Clausewitz wrote that “success is not due simply to general
causes. Particular factors can often be decisive—details only known to
those who were on the spot... while issues can be decided by chances and
incidents so minute as to figure in histories simply as anecdotes.” The
element of chance, interacting randomly with the various parts of the
system, introduces even more complexity and unpredictability.
It is not simply the number of parts that makes a system complex:
it is the way those parts interact. A machine can be complicated and
consist of numerous parts, but the parts generally interact in a
specific, designed way or else the machine will not function. While some
systems behave mechanistically, complex systems most definitely do not.
Complex systems tend to be open systems, interacting frequently and
freely with other systems and the external environment.
The fundamental point is that any military action, by its very
nature a complex system, will exhibit messy, unpredictable, and often
chaotic behavior that defies orderly, efficient, and precise control.
Our approach to command and control must find a way to cope with this
inherent complexity.
7
SYSTEMS CONTROL: COMMAND AND CONTROL IN COMMUNICATIONS
Operational Systems Control (SYSCON) represents the current

operations and day-to-day management of the operational communications
network. The operational SYSCON center, which is normally staffed by
supporting communications unit personnel, serves as the
focal point for information regarding the health of the SYSCON
current network, maximizes the effectiveness of
communications resources to meet operational demands,
and remedies deficiencies and outages. Operational
COMMAND
CONTROL
SYSCON is the medium through which the Commanding
Officer, via the Communications planner, exercises
command and control over the communications network.
As you learned at The Basic School through your
study of MCDP 6 - Command and Control, command and
control is essential to the survival and success of any
cooperative enterprise, communications being no TECHCON
exception. We have seen in the POI thus far that
communications is a rather complex and resource-intensive discipline.
Therefore, you, as a Communications planner, must effectively exercise
command and control to make the most of your resources to accomplish
your mission— people, information, material, and time. Additionally, you
will, through your SYSCON, decide what needs to be done to correct a
deficiency and then direct efforts toward a resolution via the Technical
Control (TECHCON). The TECHCON will in turn reciprocate with control
in the form of constant feedback, the continuous flow of information
about the situation in order to allow the SYSCON to adjust and modify
the plan of action as needed. Note: The term TECHCON does not strictly
refer to the technical control discipline (MOS: 2821/2823) in this
context. TECHCON refers to all technical authorities responsible for
the installation, operation, and maintenance of communications services
(data, wire, technical control, etc.).
No matter the unit or how complex a network is, the function of
SYSCON will always be required and expected. As mentioned previously,
SYSCON is our approach to cope with, contain, and/or prevent otherwise
messy, unpredictable, and chaotic behavior that defies orderly,
efficient, and precise control in the operation and maintenance of our
communications networks that are heavily relied upon to support combat
operations. Note: Not every unit will call the command and control
function entity of the communications network “SYSCON” but the function
will still exist in some fashion (NOC – Network Operations Center, Radio
Watch, etc.).
Each unit performs Systems Control differently. It will be your
responsibility to communicate with your higher and adjacent entities to
ensure that you operate in accordance with the norm.
8
SYSCON
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
WIRE DATA TRANSMISSION SERVICE
CONTROL ASSURANCE
OUTSIDE ELECTRONIC
SERVERS SATELLITE
PLANT MAINT.
SWITCHING LAN RADIO MOTOR T
WAN TERRESTRIAL ENGINEERS

Technical Control Facility/Platoon Workspaces
Sample Internal COMMCON Reporting Structure (Communication Detachment)
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF A SYSCON WATCH
A SYSCON Watch is typically comprised of a Watch Officer and a

Watch Chief with ranks varying depending on unit. These Marines are
responsible for the overall performance and stability of the
communications architecture as published in the Operation Order Annex
K. Each watch stander, Watch Officer or Watch Chief, should be
capable of performing the following tasks:
a. Maintain visibility and situational awareness of the

operational communications network by monitoring system performance,
collecting and analyzing traffic data and outage reports, conducting
quality checks and tests to gauge network viability, and maintaining
initiative and tempo.
b. Receive direction from higher SYSCONs as required.
c. Implement and supervise the execution of communications plans,

orders, and technical directives and provide direction to the local
TECHCON facility and the subordinate SYSCONs. Coordinate with higher,
adjacent, and subordinate SYSCONs as required.
d. Coordinate actions for service restoration and, when required,

supervise emergency adjustments to the communications network.
e. Prepare, maintain, and distribute information management

products related to the communications network, including information
systems directories, user operating instructions, and communications-
electronics operating instructions (CEOI).
f. Prepare, maintain, collect, and submit reports from local

facilities and subordinate SYSCONs to higher SYSCONs.
9
g. Recommend corrective actions to higher SYSCONs for network
adjustments or changes.
h. Ensure network-wide compliance with applicable security

directives.
SYSTEMS CONTROL PROCEDURES
SYSCON is a process-driven function with standards for nearly every

procedure. There will typically be a template for nearly all instances
in a locally-generated Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) of some kind.
Refer to the Supplemental Materials portion of this publication for some
examples of the following items:
1. Network Outages: In the case of a network outage, SYSCONs are

to establish contact with the proper technical authority (Technical
Control, Data, Transmissions, Wire, etc.) to determine a possible Reason
for Outage and proposed Fix Action. SYSCON will then drive all
troubleshooting steps and procedures based on the technical authority’s
recommendations. The SYSCON Watch will maintain a detailed logbook to
provide situational awareness to anyone who may require it (the
Commanding Officer, higher SYSCONs, and future watch standers). Logbooks
should answer the 5 W’s for each situation (Who, What, When, Where, and
Why). The SYSCON Watch maintains constant contact with the technical
authority to guarantee full awareness of the situation. Upon resolution,
the SYSCON Watch will review the logbook with the technical authority to
ensure completeness and accuracy.
2. Authorized Service Interruptions: Authorized Service

Interruptions (ASIs) allow for the temporary discontinuation of services
to conduct installation, maintenance, and/or improvements to the
communications network as authorized by the senior SYSCON on the network.
ASIs are required to take any previously operational service offline in
order to make such an adjustment to the architecture.
While most ASIs are very technical in nature, the SYSCON controls
the network and therefore leads the planning and preparation process in
conjunction with the SPE Cell. Prior to ASI execution, the SYSCON ensures
that all parties involved have a thorough understanding of all steps
required to complete the prescribed ASI.
The SYSCON must remain aware of ASI progress throughout. As with
network outages, the SYSCON must maintain a detailed logbook of major
milestones and complications throughout the ASI process. If the ASI
appears to be straying from the previously established timeline, the
SYSCON will request an extension from the higher SYSCON. All ASIs must
be completed in accordance with previously established timelines unless
other approved through an official extension.
3. Operational Directives: Operational Directives (OpDirs)

enable higher SYSCONs to task subordinate SYSCONs with making approved
changes to the network during prescribed timeslots to improve quality
10
of service, security, and/or performance. OpDirs are typically developed
and staffed by the SPE prior to dissemination for implementation. The
SYSCON is responsible for receipt of, tasking, supervision of completion,
and reporting completion to the higher SYSCON.
4. River City: River City is a code word that describes a

communications control plan that limits access to unsecure
communications to prevent the leakage of sensitive information. River
City is a condition set by the Commander via the G-3 in which only
previously specified users may access services such as DSN and NIPRNET.
River City implementation is usually the result of a Commander’s Critical
Information Requirement (CCIR) being met (i.e. a casualty in the AO).
Most commonly, River City serves as a rumor control mechanism to allow
the Department of Defense to be the first to notify the families of a
MIA/WIA/KIA vice unofficial form of communication.
The communications control process is a joint responsibility
between the G-3 and the G-6. The exemption list is vetted and approved
through the G-3 and implemented by the G-6. The G-6 typically maintains
no control on the exemption list approval process.
Each unit has varying policies and procedures regarding River City
implementation. The SYSCON is typically responsible for ensuring that
all unapproved services are suspended for those without exemption status
upon receipt of the order from the higher SYSCON. It is important that
each SYSCON rehearse River City on a regular basis to ensure that all
user groups on the phone switch and data networks remain up to date and
that each functional section is prepared to implement when required.
5. SYSCON Briefs: Each SYSCON is responsible for maintaining an

acute awareness of network happenings at all times. SYSCON Briefs,
depending on the unit, are the forum for the SYSCON Watch Officer to
brief the Communications planner (independent S-6), Detachment
OIC/Commanding Officer (communications battalion/squadron/detachment),
and/or the G-6 on the current and past network status along with upcoming
events such as ASIs and/or OpDirs. Each unit maintains its own brief
format and each commander has his/her own guidelines for the information
they expect to see. The SYSCON Watch Officer should establish a brief
format prior to deployment and be prepared to refine periodically.
6. Communications Status Reports: Depending on the unit, the

SYSCON may be required to complete an additional report known as a
Communications Status (COMSTAT) Report to be submitted to the higher
SYSCON on a periodic basis informing them of any service degradations or
outages. This requirement and format will be published in an SOP or
Annex K.
11
NETWORK MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT TOOLS
The Marine Corps has begun utilizing automated network monitoring

and management tools (non-program of record) throughout the years to
assist in performing SYSCON and network planning/management. The two
most common tools used to date include:
1. Sincioco’s Marine Corps Electronic Logbook: A free software

application used throughout the Marine Corps in various operations to
include Operation Iraqi Freedom and Operation Enduring Freedom.
2. Orion Solarwinds: A software application based on locally

generated SQL databases designed to provide network monitoring
capability to assist in detecting, diagnosing, and resolving network
problems. Each MEF has purchased licenses to be employed at the unit
level. Solicit your higher headquarters about obtaining a license if
necessary. They will distribute based on need and availability.
REFERENCES

Glossary 2011
12
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE
ECC E22
10/1/2015
1. Given a tactical scenario, task organization, table of

equipment, and commander’s initial planning guidance identify
hazardous material safety requirements for communications equipment in
order to support the commander’s communication system requirements for
command and control during a field exercise per MCO 4450.12A (Storage
and Handling of Hazardous Material) (0602-MNGT-1702ab).

equipment, and commander’s initial planning guidance identify
hazardous material safety requirements for communications support
equipment in order to support the commander’s communication system
requirements for command and control during a field exercise per MCO
4450.12A (Storage and Handling of Hazardous Material) (0602-MNGT-
1702ac).
2
INTRODUCTION
Chemicals are found everywhere. They purify drinking water,

increase crop production, and simplify household chores. But chemicals
also can be hazardous to humans or the environment if used or released
improperly. Hazards can occur during production, storage,
transportation, use, or disposal. You and your community are at risk if
a chemical is used unsafely or released in harmful amounts into the
environment where you live, work, or play.
Hazardous materials in various forms can cause death, serious

injury, long-lasting health effects, and damage to buildings, homes, and
other property. Many products containing hazardous chemicals are used
and stored in homes routinely. These products are also shipped daily on
the nation's highways, railroads, waterways, and pipelines.
Chemical manufacturers are one source of hazardous materials, but

there are many others, including service stations, hospitals, and
hazardous materials waste sites.
Varying quantities of hazardous materials are manufactured, used,

or stored at an estimated 4.5 million facilities in the United States-
-from major industrial plants to local dry cleaning establishments or
gardening supply stores.
Hazardous materials come in the form of explosives, flammable and

combustible substances, poisons, and radioactive materials. These
substances are most often released as a result of transportation
accidents or because of chemical accidents in plants.
Many commodities used by DoD are hazardous or contain hazardous

materials that have special requirements for storage and handling. The
dangers posed by these items can be serious and personnel need to be
aware of the domestic and international laws and regulations associated
with them. These laws and regulations place special emphasis on
communicating the hazards associated with these products because
exposure can result in serious personal injury, permanent disabilities
and even death. Property and the environment may also be damaged or
destroyed. It is imperative that all workers recognize and understand
the hazards associated with these commodities. No single functional area
is exempt from these risks to health, safety and property.
It is essential that hazardous materials are accurately identified

to insure safe storage, handling and disposal. Federal regulatory
agencies require manufacturers and distributors to identify the
physical, health and environmental hazards of their commodities in
several ways. Placards, labels, markings, and MSDS are just some of the
means used to convey this information. The methods and procedures of
identification and classification in this document are in a simplified
outline. This does not relieve individuals working with these materials
from the responsibility of having full awareness and
3
understanding of the requirements for hazard communications. Also,
hazardous material personnel shall be responsible, unless otherwise
specified, for full compliance with the mandatory provisions referenced
MCO 4450.12A (Storage and Handling of Hazardous Material).
As a Communications planner you will have and be responsible for

the safe storage and handling of hazardous materials within your shop
or section. This lesson is to teach you how to protect yourself, your
Marines and to effectively monitor a Hazard Communication Program.
HAZMAT LAWS, ORDERS, & AGENCIES
a. Laws. Congress, states, and local communities have enacted a

number of environmental laws aimed at protecting human health and
improving environmental quality. These laws are designed specifically to
provide cleaner air and water, to ensure the safety of drinking water
sources, to protect valuable natural resources, and to properly manage
toxic substances and hazardous wastes. The Marine Corps is committed to
attaining and sustaining compliance with all applicable environmental
laws and regulations and considers such compliance vital to the
successful performance of its mission.
(1) Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA). The

Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) of 1976, as amended in
1984, focuses on regulating Hazardous Wastes (HWs). RCRA defines
hazardous wastes by their characteristic of ignitability, corrosivity,
reactivity, toxicity, or a special EPA listing. The regulations
established a cradle-to-grave manifest system for tracking hazardous
wastes. Owners of underground storage tanks containing petroleum
products and regulated substances must notify the states of the existence
of all underground tanks. The act provides for assistance to the state
and local agencies, prohibits open dumping, regulates the management of
Hazardous Waste (HW), encourages recycling, reuse, and treatment of HW,
and provides guidelines for solid waste management, resource recovery,
and resource conservation systems. RCRA provides for “cradle to grave”
tracking of HW, from point of generation through ultimate disposal,
placing responsibility on the hazardous waste generator.
(2) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). The EPA may

delegate authority to a State to manage a RCRA program in lieu of part
or the entire Federal Hazardous Waste program. Hazardous Waste
installations in a State with final authorization are subject to the
State program, which must be equivalent to and may be more stringent
then the Federal program.
b. References Used To Determine Hazardous Material/Waste.

Technical Manuals (TM’s) and Lubrication Order/Instructions (LO/LI)
identify Hazardous Material (HM) (e.g. pol’s, sulfuric acid, solvents,
etc) for motor transport personnel to use order to maintain there
vehicles in operating readiness. It is essential that hazardous materials
are accurately identified to insure safe storage, handling
4
and disposal. Federal regulatory agencies require manufacturers and
distributors to identify the physical, health and environmental hazards
of their commodities in several ways. Placards, labels, markings, and
MSDS are just some of the means used to convey this information. The
methods and procedures of identification and classification in this
document (MCO 4450-12A) are in a simplified outline. This does not
relieve individuals working with these materials from the responsibility
of having full awareness and understanding of the requirements for hazard
communications. Also, hazardous material personnel shall be responsible,
unless otherwise specified, for full compliance with the mandatory
provisions referenced in this publication. The OSHA Hazard
Communication Standard (HCS) requires evaluation of the hazards of all
chemicals in the workplace and that information concerning the potential
hazards and protective measures are provided to both employers and
employees.
(1) Typical Placards of a Communications Platoon.
Label HazMat Class Typical Material
Corrosive Battery Electrolyte
Dangerous When Wet Lithium sulfur dioxide
Flammable Solid Lithium sulfur dioxide
Poison Inhalation
Hydrogen Sulfide
Hazard
Flammable Liquid Acetone, Spray Paint, Petroleum
5
NOTE: Lithium sulfur dioxide batteries contain toxic gas and can cause
respiratory paralysis in high concentrations. However, they have
excellent warning properties; sulfur gas stinks like rotten eggs. Lithium
metal is highly reactive, capable of bursting in flames when wet.
c. The purpose of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is to ensure

that harmful chemicals do not enter the body through one of the routes
of entry (i.e. inhalation, absorption, ingestion). The type of PPE used
will vary depending on the type of chemical involved and in no case
should be substitute for a safe work practice but only as a supplemental
safety measure. Not all PPE is designed to protect against all types
of chemicals. To ensure the PPE is suitable to the hazard presented by
the specific chemical, consult both the Industrial Hygienist as well as
the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). Examples of PPE are:
(1) Gloves
(2) Hoods
(3) Aprons
(4) Sleeves
(5) Suits
(6) Boots
(7) Chemical resistant goggles
(8) Helmet
(9) Respirator - The use of respirators requires that a

respiratory protection program be in place at the level of use. The
respiratory program includes a needs assessment, PPE selection, worker
training, medical evaluation and fitness testing for those personnel
involved.
(10) Safety Showers - Safety showers are located in most

facilities having battery rooms in the event a liquid hazardous material
or waste comes in contact with significant portions of the person in
question. Safety showers should be checked on a regular basis to ensure
operational readiness in the event of a real emergency. Additionally,
safety showers should be flushed regularly to prevent the growth of
canthomoeba, a bacteria that has been found to grow on water and can
cause blindness.
(11) Eye Wash Stations - Similar to safety showers, eye wash

stations are located in most facilities having battery rooms, in the
event a liquid hazardous material or waste comes in contact with the
6
tissue of the eye or the skin area immediately surrounding the ocular
area.
IDENTIFYING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL/WASTE
a. Hazardous Materials -- DOT (49 CFR). A substance or material,

which has been determined by the Secretary of Transportation to be
capable of posing an unreasonable risk to health, safety, and property
when transported in commerce, and which has been so designated. The term
includes hazardous substances, hazardous wastes, marine pollutants, and
elevated temperature materials. Materials designated as hazardous under
the provisions of CFR 49, sections 172.101, 172.102, and materials that
meet the defining criteria for hazard classes and divisions in Part 173.
b. Hazardous Substance -- EPA (40 CFR). A material, including its

mixtures and solutions, that is capable of posing an unreasonable risk
to health, safety, and property when transported in a quantity (in one
package) which equals or exceeds the reportable quantity (RQ) listed in
the appendix to 49 CFR 172.101.
c. Hazardous Chemicals –- OSHA (29 CFR). Hazardous materials used

in the workplace that are regulated under OSHA "right-to-know"
regulations in Title 29 CFR 1910.1200. A physical hazard means a chemical
for which there is scientifically valid evidence that the chemical can
be classified as a physical hazard (combustible liquid, organic peroxide,
compressed gas, oxidizer, explosive, pyrophoric, flammable, unstable, or
water reactive). A health hazard is a chemical that may cause acute or
chronic health effects to exposed employees.
(1) Acute. Acute effects usually occur rapidly because of

short-term exposure and are of short duration.
(2) Chronic. Chronic effects generally occur because of

long-term exposure and are of a long duration.
(3) Health hazards include:
(a) Carcinogen. A carcinogen is a chemical that causes

cancer in humans or has the potential to cause cancer.
(b) Corrosive. A corrosive chemical is one that causes

visible destruction of irreversible alterations in living tissue by
chemical action at the site of contact.
(c) Irritant. An irritant chemical is one which is not

corrosive but which causes a reversible inflammatory effect on living
tissue by chemical action at the site of contact.
7
(d) Sensitizer. A sensitizer is a chemical which causes
a substantial portion of exposed people to develop an allergic reaction
in normal tissue after repeated exposure to the chemical.
d. Hazardous Waste –- EPA (40 CFR). Any solid waste that meets the
definition in 40 CFR 261.3 and/or identified as a specific state
hazardous waste. A discarded material that may be solid, semi-solid,
liquid, or contained gas which because of its quantity, concentration,
or physical, chemical or infectious characteristics may:
(1) Cause or significantly contribute to an increase in

mortality or an increase in serious irreversible illness.
(2) Pose a substantial present or potential hazard to human

health or the environment when improperly treated, stored, transported,
or disposed of, or otherwise managed. EPA considers hazardous waste a
subset of both solid waste and hazardous materials. Technically, solid
wastes that are determined to be hazardous wastes are those wastes that
are regulated under RCRA 40 CFR 261.31, 261.32 or 261.33 either because
they are listed wastes or because they are ignitable, corrosive, reactive
or toxic (characteristic wastes) and not excluded under 40 CFR 261.4
contains a list of the solid wastes excluded from hazardous waste
classification.
SAFE HANDLING OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL
Title 29 CFR, section 1910.1200, requires that employers provide

employees with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their
work area at the time of their initial assignment and whenever a new
hazard is introduced into their work areas. This employee training
shall include at least:
a. Methods and observations that may be used to detect the

presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (e.g.,
monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices,
visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released).
b. The physical and health hazards of all chemicals in the work

area.
c. The measures employees can take to protect themselves from

these hazards, including specific measures the employer has
implemented to protect employees from exposure to hazardous chemicals,
such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal
protective equipment (PPE) to be used.
d. The details of the Hazard Communication Program developed by

the employer, including an explanation of the labeling system and the
MSDS, and how the employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard
information.
8
RECORDS
The OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (HCS) requires evaluation

of the hazards of all chemicals in the workplace and that information
concerning the potential hazards and protective measures are provided to
both employers and employees. The HCS generally applies to any chemical
which is a health or physical hazard to which employees may be exposed
under normal use conditions or in a foreseeable emergency. Ensure that
the following information is available for all chemicals stored, handled,
or used in the workplace:
a. Copies of any Materials Safety Data Sheets are received and

maintained so that employees have access to the information. This
requirement may be met through the use of the DoD Hazardous Materials
Information System (HMIS).
b. Understanding the Material Safety Data Sheets. The purpose of

the MSDS is to provide detailed information on each hazardous chemical,
including potential hazardous effects, physical and chemical
characteristics, and recommendations for appropriate protective
measures. The regulation does not require the information to be presented
in any specific order or format. The required information is generally
divided into nine sections:
(1) Production identification
(2) Hazardous ingredients
(3) Physical data
(4) Fire and explosion data
(5) Health hazard information
(6) Reactivity data
(7) Spill or leak procedures
(8) Special protection information
(9) Special precautions
c. MSDS Accessibility. MSDS’s must be readily available to

employees when they are in their work areas. MSDS’s for all hazardous
materials must be readily available to all personnel during each work
shift. For employees who must travel between workplaces during a work
shift, the MSDS may be kept at the primary workplace facility. Acceptable
methods for retaining MSDS’s in the workplace are the MSDS file and the
Hazardous Material Information System (HMIS). The responsible individual
should verify the HMIL against on-hand MSDS file. If any MSDS’s are
missing, a current MSDS can be acquired by:
9
(1) Contacting the manufacturer directly.
(2) Printing a copy from the HMIS.
(3) Accessing the exact chemical and manufacturer from a

variety of search engines on the Internet.
d. Chemical warning labels are affixed to each container and are

not removed or defaced.
e. Where hazardous chemicals are packaged, handled, reacted,

transferred, or used a written hazard communication program is
required. This written plan should not be complicated, but must
identify how the requirements for labels and other forms of warning,
MSDS’s (Example pg 2-7 MCO 4450-12A), and employee information and
training will be met at a particular location.
f. Inventory Requirements. Establishing the Hazardous Material

Inventory List (HMIL). The HMIL will be comprehensive and must
include:
(1) Complete name of hazardous chemical.
(2) Name of manufacturer or distributor.
(3) National Stock Number (NSN) or identification #.
(4) Quantity Maintained on Hand.
STORAGE
A facility designed to store hazardous materials in compliance with

DoD requirements will address the following, as a minimum, in the system
safety analysis (SSA): roof/ceiling, walls/columns, walking/working
surfaces, climate control, ventilation, access/egress, electrical
systems, lighting, alarms, monitors, communications, plumbing, fire
suppression, heat/smoke and explosion venting, spill control and
containment, emergency eyewash/shower and first aid, storage aids, and
training and emergency spill procedures. In developing storage layout
plans, it should be noted that hazardous materials have characteristics
that require the materials be specially stored or handled to prevent
risks to personnel or to the facility in which they are stored. To ensure
the maximum correct storage controls and protection of the safety and
health of workers, a hazardous material/chemical inventory is required
of all hazardous materials being stored. This inventory must consist of
the same product identity as specified on the MSDS, the quantity on
hand, and the date the inventory was established. The inventory should
be revised as often as needed depending on the severity of the hazardous
chemicals and specific control requirements as delineated in 29 CFR,
part 1910, subpart Z, Toxic and Hazardous Substances. The long-term
10
HW storage facility shall be utilized to store HW/HM awaiting disposal
by Marine Corps Base and their tenants. HW generators can store HW
waiting turn-in. The Marine Corps uses three types of temporary
accumulation and storage sites, which are:
a. 90-Day Site. Less than 90-day storage areas are used to store
HW temporarily until it is either manifested and shipped off site for
disposal or transferred to a permitted storage facility on site. HW’s at
these areas may be stored only for 90 days.
b. Satellite Accumulation Area (SAA). SAA is a term developed by

EPA to designate a work site that may generate and accumulate HW without
regard to the 90-day storage limit normally applicable to non- permitted
HW storage facilities.
c. Universal Waste Site (UWS). The purpose of establishing a

special sub-category of hazardous waste storage is to assist the
generators of Universal Waste (UW) in tracking and managing Universal
Waste.
(1) The requirements for marking the container's

Accumulation Start Date are dependent upon where the waste is being
accumulated (90-day, SAA, UWS). Disposal procedures can be found in Base
Orders.
d. Hazardous Waste Storage Practice:
(1) Label containers
(2) Inspect condition of container
(3) Inspect weekly for leaks or corrosion
(4) Ensure incompatible wastes or isolated
(5) Mark accumulation start date
e. Spill management procedures. DOD installations with facilities

that may discharge oil, HM hazardous wastes, or hazardous substances in
reportable quantity are required by statute to prepare a Spill Prevention
Control and Countermeasure plan (SPCC). The SPCC plan is oriented
toward prevention of spills and releases of HM. The effects of a spill
or release can range from superficial damage with few or no injuries to
a mishap of catastrophic proportions involving loss of life, widespread
damage, and major environmental damage. Regardless of the extent of the
damage, productive time is nearly always lost as personnel and facilities
are evacuated, damage is assessed, and the release is cleaned up. In
more severe cases, the facility's ability to perform its assigned mission
may be impaired either temporarily or for a prolonged period if it
becomes necessary to suspend operations. When the total cost of an HM
mishap is considered, including lost productivity, cleanup and
restoration, and
11
replenishment of lost Government-owned stocks, the appropriateness of
the expression "an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure" is
obvious in the case of HM management.
f. SPCC Plan Requirements. Facility SPCC plans will, as a

minimum; specifically address the following areas per Title 40 CFR,
Part 112:
(1) Maintenance of complete records of all spills or

releases, federally reportable or not, occurring at the facility. The
spills occurring during the past 12 months will be identified and
listed together with corrective actions taken in each case. Specific
plans implemented to prevent recurrences in each case will also be
listed.
(2) Predictions of the direction of flow, rate, and maximum

quantities of oil or hazardous substances that might be spilled or
released for each storage location or handling site.
(3) Containment provisions and diversion structures or

equipment in place for use to prevent the discharge from reaching
surface waters or other sensitive resources. Preventive systems may
include dikes, berms, curbs, gutters or other drainage systems, booms,
diversion or retention ponds, or absorbent materials.
(4) Conformance to EPA guidelines published in Title 40 CFR

pertaining, where applicable, to drainage, bulk storage tanks,
transfer operations, and pumping.
(5) Regular SPCC inspections must be conducted. Signed

records of inspections must be retained as part of the SPCC plan for 3
years.
(6) Security procedures and precautions.
(7) Requirements for personnel training and spill

prevention procedures briefings.
(8) Any of the following information that can be developed

separately or included in the above listing:
(a) Identification of populations at risk. In

addition to considering nearby civilian population centers,
consideration will be given to on base populations in administrative
offices, family housing, etc.
(b) Identification or environmentally sensitive areas,

probable need for conservation efforts, and the presence of endangered
species and other protected resources.
12
(c) Consideration of local geography, hydrology, and
climate.
(d) Most probable locations for pollution incidents.
g. SPCC plans must be updated every 3 years and approved by a

registered professional engineer. In addition, the SPCC plan must be
amended and recertified whenever there is a change to a facility that
would effect the facility's potential for an oil or hazardous substance
spill (i.e., a new tank is installed, berms are modified, etc.).
h. Installation Spill Contingency Planning (ISCP). Under the

National Contingency Plan, Title 40 CFR, part 300, federal installations
are to respond to their own oil and hazardous substance spills. Thorough
preplanning of oil and hazardous substance spill response is necessary
so that when a spill occurs, facility personnel can respond quickly and
effectively, minimizing damage to human health and the environment.
Contingency planning must take into consideration the following phases
of spill response: discovery, notification, assessment, containment,
cleanup, and disposal. Units accumulating hazardous waste are required
to have a site specific Unit Spill Contingency Plan (USCP) as part of
their command SOP. Contents of the USCP can be found in Base Orders.
i. Spill contingency plans contain certain types of advanced

preparedness information, including amounts and locations of response
equipment and materials, and are primarily oriented toward specifying
procedures to be followed in the event of a spill or release of oil or
hazardous chemicals. Spill contingency plans will contain:
(1) Names, addresses, and 24-hour phone numbers of the On-

scene commander and alternates.
(2) Emergency equipment and response materials, locations,

and capabilities.
(3) An evacuation plan, including signals, evacuation

routes, and alternate routes.
(4) A description of arrangements with local fire and

police departments, hospitals, contractors, and State and local
emergency response teams for response or coordination of services.
(5) A description of personnel action and responsibilities

required in response to known or suspected personnel exposures, fires,
explosions, or any unplanned sudden or gradual release of oil, HM,
hazardous substances, or hazardous wastes to air, soil, or surface
water at the facility or nearby community. This response is generally
described in the following sequence:
13
(a) Phase I, Discovery and notification (including
both internal reporting and notification of participating outside
organizations)
(b) Phase II, Containment and countermeasures (such as

public health protection, source control, barrier placement, etc)
(c) Phase II, Cleanup, mitigation, and disposal
(d) Phase IV, Documentation (including external

reporting and follow-up written reports)
DISPOSAL
a. Regulations, DLA, through the Defense Reutilization and

Marketing Service, has the mission responsibility for centralized
disposal management of certain categories of DoD generated hazardous
property. DRMS administers contracts with commercial hazardous waste
disposal firms for the removal and ultimate disposal of these wastes.
These contracts are also used for disposing of excess hazardous material
for which there is no reutilization, transfer, donation, or sales
potential.
b. Guidance for turning in hazardous property to DRMO is contained

in DoD 4160.21-M, Defense Material Disposition Manual, Chapter 10.
Contact the local DRMO to receive a handout that contains hours of
operation, points of contact, and sample documentation. Prior to
turning in property, it is recommended that customers coordinate with
the DRMO. This will enable the DRMO to schedule the turn in and will
provide customers with an opportunity to obtain information regarding
any recent changes to existing turn-in requirements.
c. Generators of hazardous waste are responsible for the costs of

disposing of hazardous wastes. Funding for hazardous waste disposal is
arranged through the MILLSBILLS interfund system. Any exceptions to
this arrangement will be documented accordingly. DRMS does not establish
or identify a MILLSBILLS fund code. The service/agency financial
organizations do this. Generators should contact their supporting
Defense Finance and Accounting Service (DFAS) and ask for the Interfund
POC. To establish a generator account for hazardous waste disposal,
contact DRMS-SHP at DSN 932-4784 or 616-961-4784. For inquiries regarding
hazardous waste billing, contact DRMS-OFA at DSN 932-5838/5818 or 616-
961-5838/5818.
d. Accurate identification of hazardous waste is essential for

proper disposal. Misidentified or unknown hazardous wastes present
special problems which may result in unusually excessive lab analysis
testing costs and cause delays in disposal action. As a general rule,
different types of wastes should not be combined, commingled, or mixed.
14
e. Under certain circumstances, some service commands are
authorized to administer disposal of their hazardous wastes.
When this occurs, the service procedures should be followed.
f. Packing requirement for the disposal of Hazardous

Material/Waste: All generated wastes must be properly packaged, marked,
labeled, and certified in accordance with the appropriate shipping
regulations before they can be shipped or before the DRMO will accept
them. DOD components are individually responsible for disposal of those
categories of waste (e.g., municipal trash, radioactive waste,
infectious medical items, munitions, etc.) which, for practical and
economical reasons, were not assigned to DLA.
WRITTEN HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM
Employers must develop, implement, and maintain at the workplace

a written, comprehensive hazard communication program that includes
provisions for container labeling, collection and availability of
MSDS's, and an employee information and training program. The program
must also contain a list of chemicals in each work area, the means the
employer will use to inform employees of the hazards of non-routine
tasks, and the hazards associated with chemicals in unlabeled pipes.
Hazardous chemical information must also be made available to non-
organic personnel such as contractors conducting work at each site.
a. Four essential components of HazCom Program:
(1) Labels and other forms of warning.
(2) MSDS’s.
(3) Employee training and information.
(4) Written Hazard communication Program.
BATTERY SAFETY
The purpose of this section is to provide guidelines to reduce

hazards associated with battery charging, handling, and storage
operations.
Users must be aware of any limitations and restrictions that may
exist with batteries and associated equipment.
15
Exploded battery case in CYZ-10
BATTERY CHARGING FACILITY
a. Battery charging facilities will be constructed as separate,

free-standing buildings wherever practicable. The facility must be well-
ventilated. If hood and exhaust fans are used for ventilation, the fan
must have non-ferrous metal blades and a spark-proof motor. Eating or
drinking is not permitted in the charging stations when handling the
batteries or working around chargers. There must always be at least two
people in the station whenever handling or charging batteries.
b. Warning Signs. The battery charging facility will be

conspicuously posted as an "EYE HAZARD AREA" and a "CORROSIVE,
CHEMICAL," or "ACID HAZARD AREA." "NO SMOKING" signs will be
conspicuously posted both inside and immediately outside the battery
charging and/or storage facility.
c. A safety board will be installed in the battery shop and at a

minimum contain the following.
(1) Eye protection (clean and stored in plastic bags).

Requirements are for full face shield and chemical splash goggles.
(2) Rubber gloves.
(3) Two inch stenciled emergency phone numbers.
16
(4) A complete first aid kit with inventory list.
(5) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
d. Leaking batteries must always be handled with neoprene, rubber

or latex protective gloves. If any electrolyte comes in contact with
bare skin, rinse with generous quantities of water and wash with soap
and water. Seek medical attention if burning or irritation persists.
BATTERY FACILITY REGULATIONS
a. Never allow personnel access when batteries are charging

(unless wearing proper protective equipment).
b. All electrical equipment, e.g., fans, lights, battery

chargers, and test equipment must be properly grounded. The floor of
the battery charging facility should be insulated with rubber matting.
c. Smoking, open flames, and spark-causing hazards are prohibited

near the battery charging area.
d. A class "D" fire extinguisher, with a current inspection tag,

will be maintained in the battery charging and storage facility. A
fire bill will be prominently posted. If a class "D" extinguisher is
not available or not authorized, a class "C" extinguisher may be used
in the battery charging area and a class "A" in the storage area.
e. The battery storage area will be well-ventilated and located

apart from other equipment and buildings as much as possible.
f. An emergency deluge shower and eye wash fountain will be

maintained in the battery charging facility. A guideline will be
stretched from the working area to the shower in order to facilitate
the movement of a temporarily blinded worker to the shower.
g. The following items will be maintained in the battery storage

facility.
17
(1) Baking soda and vinegar and/or a boric acid solution
or a bottle of all-purpose neutralizing agent.
(2) A bucket containing sufficient clean/clear water to

allow the immediate immersion of a battery shop worker's extremities
(head, hands, arms, etc.) or to douse a panicked individual.
(3) A prominently posted set of first aid instructions.
SAFE CHARGING PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following list of safety precautions and requirements

when charging and storing batteries.
1. Always wear the proper protective clothing, e.g., face shield

or chemical splash goggles, polyethylene or rubber gloves, and a
rubber apron, when charging or working on batteries.
2. Keep all sparks, flames and cigarettes away from batteries.

Make sure the work area is well ventilated.
3. Never attempt to open a battery with non-removable vents.
4. Exercise caution when working with metallic tools or

conductors to prevent short circuits and sparks.
5. Never attempt to charge a battery without first reviewing the

instructions for the charger being used.
6. Turn chargers off before connecting leads to a battery in

order to avoid dangerous sparks.
7. Never attempt to charge a frozen or visibly damaged battery.
8. Do not attempt to charge or recharge any non-rechargeable

(primary) battery.
9. Do not disassemble any battery unless authorized by the

appropriate TM for your level of maintenance.
10. Do not short circuit batteries or bypass any internal fuses.
HANDLING LEAKING BATTERIES
1. Battery acid or electrolyte can destroy clothing and burn the

skin.
2. Use extreme caution when handling electrolyte and keep an acid
18
neutralizing solution such as baking soda or household ammonia mixed
with water readily available.
3. Always wear proper eye, face and hand protection. If

electrolyte is splashed into an eye, immediately force the eye open
and flood it with clean, cool water for at least 15 minutes. Get
prompt medical attention.
BA-5590B/U CARCASS
4. If electrolyte is taken internally, drink large quantities of

water or milk. DO NOT induce vomiting. Get prompt medical attention.
5. Neutralize with baking soda any electrolyte that spills on a

vehicle or a work area. After neutralizing, rinse contaminated area
clean with water.
6. If premixed electrolyte is not available and water and

sulfuric acid must be mixed, ALWAYS POUR THE CONCENTRATED ACID SLOWLY
INTO THE WATER. NEVER POUR WATER INTO THE ACID. Always stir the
water while adding acid. If noticeable heat develops, allow solution
to cool before continuing to add the acid.
HAZARD COMMUNICATION STANDARD (HCS)
The OSHA Hazard Communication Standard is intended to reduce the

incidence of chemical related occupational illnesses and injuries. The
standard establishes minimum requirements that employee’s must adhere to
for communicating hazards to workers. This standard is often referred
to as the “Workers Right To Know” standard. The 29 CFR 1910.1200
established the Federal Hazard Communication Standard requirements.
These requirements cover the hazardous material inventory list (HMIL),
material safety data sheets (MSDS), labeling, and training.
1. Hazardous Material Inventory List (HMIL). Each shop will

maintain a complete inventory of all hazardous materials. The HMIL
19
will include the complete name of the product, manufacturer or
distributor and the NSN or product identification number.
2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). The MSDS is a technical

bulletin detailing information about a hazardous chemical. Every
chemical manufacturer or importer must develop or obtain an MSDS for
each hazardous chemical they supply. Distributors must provide MSDSs
to purchasers of their hazardous chemicals. Chemical Material Safety
Data Sheets (MSDS’) will be posted and adhered to for all chemicals
used in the work area. It is the battery NCOs responsibility to
ensure that updated MSDS’ are on hand, posted, and current.
3. Labeling. Hazardous material must be clearly identified

throughout its history. When hazardous materials are transferred to
alternate containers or the original labels are lost, a warning label
will be affixed to the container.
4. Training. Personnel are required to be provided with

information and training on all hazardous materials that they are
exposed to in their work place. This training is required upon
initial assignment and whenever new products are introduced into the
work area.
SAFETY TIPS FOR OPERATING COMM-ELEC EQUIPMENT
1. Inspect batteries for obvious physical damage or defect before

using. Do not use defective or previously deadlined batteries.
2. If batteries show signs of leaking, PROTECT your hands with

gloves. If you must handle a HOT battery, use the appropriate
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
3. Do not over discharge batteries. Remove batteries from

equipment immediately when they fail to operate equipment.
4. Where batteries are used in sets, always try to replace

batteries in sets.
5. Do not store batteries in equipment for longer than 30 days

when equipment is not in use. Use only batteries authorized in the
applicable TM.
6. Do not force a battery into a battery box that does not fit
easily into the battery compartment.
7. Do not use water to extinguish a battery fire if a shock

hazard exists due to electrical equipment in the area.
8. Immediately turn off equipment if the battery compartment

becomes hot to the touch. Allow the battery to cool for at least one
hour before removing.
20
9. Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide batteries contain pressurized Sulfur
Dioxide (SO2). The gas is highly toxic, and the battery must not be
abused in any way which may cause the battery to rupture.
10. Lithium-Thionyl Chloride batteries contain liquid Thionyl

Chloride (SOCI2) which fumes upon exposure to air. The vapor is
highly toxic, and the battery must not be abused in any way which may
cause the battery to rupture.
11. If you hear a HISSING SOUND (battery venting) or smell

irritating gas, LEAVE the area immediately. Secure the area and call
911.
BATTERY STORAGE
1. Do not heat, incinerate, crush, puncture, or mutilate

batteries. Exercise care in handling batteries and containers of
batteries to prevent crushing, puncturing or mutilation which may
damage the batteries.
2. Never store batteries in DIRECT SUNLIGHT or expose them to

temperatures that exceed 130(F).
3. Do not package any battery that is hot or warm.
4. Do not store batteries within EIGHT feet of other hazardous or

flammable material.
REPORTING INJURIES
Anytime a Marine is involved in any accident where they have been

injured or if they have been seen by medical personnel as a result of
an incident, they must contact their platoon, unit, or company safety
representative and complete a Mishap Report.
BATTERY INCIDENT RESPONSE REPORTING
1. Safety incidents involving batteries, where the battery has

bulged, leaked, vented or ruptured, or if personal injury or equipment
damage has occurred due to a battery deficiency or malfunction, MUST
BE report to the CECOM safety office, Fort Monmouth, New Jersey.
2. Marine Corps units will submit a Product Quality Deficiency

Report (PQDR) through Marine Corps channels which will then be routed
to CECOM.
3. Marine Corps units will report the incident by e-mail to EPS
21
MCSC and ensure that exhibit items are maintained for a minimum of
thirty days.
BATTERY ORGANIZATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT (ORM)
1. STEP 1 – Identify Hazards. Begin with appendix 1 and list

the major steps in the operation (operational analysis). Next,
conduct a Preliminary Hazard Analysis by listing all of the hazards
associated with each step in the operational analysis along with the
possible causes for those hazards.
Example. The sample unit ORM work sheet provided in appendix 1

discusses the work processes involved in running an automotive battery
charging facility. The first major step listed is battery charging.
Six preliminary hazards associated with battery charging are
identified. Below each hazard are possible causes.
- dropping the battery on feet

mishandling of battery
- battery explodes or catches fire
shorted internal cells
- inhaling acid vapors
poor ventilation
- acid exposure to hands/face
spilled acid or leaking over packs
- acid hazard to eyes
splashing acid when filling battery cells
- ingesting acid
food in the work area/poor hygiene
2. STEP 2 - Assess Hazards. For each hazard identified,

determine the associated degree of risk in terms of probability and
severity. A risk assessment matrix is provided in appendix 2.
a. The Hazard Severity (HS) is an assessment of the worst

credible consequence that can occur as a result of that hazard.
Severity is defined by the potential degree of injury, illness, and
property damage, loss of assets (time, money, personnel) or effect on
the mission. Hazard Severity categories are assigned as Roman
numerals (I, II, III, IV) in appendix 3.
b. The Mishap Probability (MP) is the probability that

a hazard will result in a mishap or loss, based on an assessment of
various factors as location, hours of operation, experience or
previously established statistical information. Mishap probability is
assigned an English letter code (A, B, C, D) in appendix 3.
c. Using the matrix in appendix R, combine the Hazard

Severity category code with the Mishap Probability code to determine
the Risk Assessment Code (RAC). The RAC is an expression of risk
22
which combines the elements of hazard severity and mishap probability.
The RAC is expressed as a single Arabic number (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) in
appendix 3.
Example. Hazards and possible causes associated with charging

batteries. By using appendix O, the assigned hazard severity and
mishap probability is cross referenced to determine the RAC for each
hazard. These are depicted in columns D, E and F of appendix 2.
HAZARD/CAUSE HS MP RAC
- dropping the battery on feet III B 3
Mishandling of battery
- battery explodes or catches fire I C 2
shorted internal cells
- inhaling acid vapors II A 1
poor ventilation
- acid exposure to hands/face III A 2
spilled acid or leaking over packs
- acid hazard to eyes II A 1
splashing acid when filling batteries
- ingesting acid IV D 5
food in the work area/poor hygiene
3. STEP 3 - Make Risk Decisions. First, develop risk control

options. Start with the most serious risk first and select controls
that will reduce the risk to a minimum consistent with mission
accomplishment. With selected controls in place, decide if the
benefit of the operation outweighs the risk. If risk outweighs
benefit or if assistance is required to implement controls,
communicate with higher authority via the chain of command.
RAC 1 – CRITICAL RAC 2 – SERIOUS RAC 3 – MODERATE

RAC 4 – MINOR RAC 5 - NEGLIGIBLE
Example. The most severe risk is inhaling acid vapors and exposure to
the eyes (both RAC 1). Apply the following risk controls.
- inhaling acid fumes

Ensure that the battery shop is well ventilated.
Post signs preventing untrained personnel from entering the battery
shop. Ensure battery NCO is not left unattended in closed battery
shop. Conduct safety training using the MSDS
- acid hazard to eyes
Ensure chemical splash goggles are available and worn
Post signs that the battery shop is a eye hazard area
Ensure eye wash station is operational
Conduct safety training using the MSDS
Example. With the below risk controls in place evaluate the RA codes.
The residual RAC is less than the initial
23
RAC. By reducing the hazard severity and mishap probability the
benefit outweighs the risk and is acceptable. The revised O codes are
depicted in columns H, I and J of appendix 2.
HAZARD/CAUSE INITIAL RESIDUAL

RAC RAC
- inhaling acid vapors 1 3

poor ventilation
- acid hazard to eyes 1 3
splashing acid when filling batteries
4. STEP 4 - Implement Controls. The following measures can be

used to eliminate hazards or reduce the degree of risk. These are
listed by order of preference:
a. Administrative Controls. Controls that reduce risks

through specific administrative actions, such as:
(1) Provide suitable warnings, markings, placards,

sign and notices.
(2) Establish written policies, programs,

instructions, and standing operating procedures.
(3) Train personnel to recognize hazards and take

appropriate precautionary measures.
(4) Limit the exposure to a hazard (either by reducing

the number of personnel/assets or the length of time exposed).
b. Engineering Controls. Controls that use engineering

methods to reduce risks by design, material selection or substitution
when technically or economically feasible.
c. Personal Protective Equipment. Serves as a barrier

between personnel and hazards. It should be used when other controls
do not reduce the hazard to an acceptable level.
5. STEP 5 – Supervise. Conduct follow-up evaluations of the

controls to ensure they remain in place and have the desired effect.
Monitor for changes that may require further ORM. Take corrective
action when necessary.
24
ORM PROCESS FLOW CHART
CONTINUE TO SUPERVISE
UNTIL THE OPERATION
LIST MAJOR STEPS ENDS
YES ARE THERE ANY N

CHANGES O
ASSIGN HAZARD ASSIGN MISHAP

SEVERITY PROBABILITY
YES
DETERMINE LEVEL OF RISK
YES ARE
N CONTROLS
O EFFECTIVE ?
CAN
BE
NO
AT THIS
LEVEL?
YES
NO IMPLEMENTED AT SUPERVISE
WITH HIGHER
AUTHORITY
YES
ORM WORK SHEET
A B C D E F G H I J
MAJOR HAZARD ANALYSIS POSSIBLE HS MP RAC DEVELOP RISK CONTROLS NEW NEW NEW
STEPS BY STEP CAUSE HS MP RAC
1. BATTERY 1A DROP BATTERY ON MISHANDLING III B 3 1A USE HANDLING STRAPS III C 4
CHARGING FOOT 1A POST HAZARD SIGN
1B BATTERY MAY INTERNAL SHORT III C 2 1B TEST CELLS WITH METER III D 5
EXPLODE
1C INHALE ACID POOR III A 1 1C DOOR OPEN III C 4

VAPORS VENTILATION 1C POST WARNING SIGNS
1C DO NOT WORK
UNATTANDED
1C MSDS TRAINING
1D SKIN/EYES EXPOSED SPILL / LEAKING III A 2 1D WEAR PPE III C 4

OVERPACK 1D NEUTRALIZE AFTER DONE
1E ACID HAZARD TO EYS SPLASHING ACID III A 1 1E WEAR CHEM SPLASH III C 4
GOGGLES
1E POST WARNING SIGNS
1E EYE WASH TESTED
1E MSDS TRAINING
1F INGESTING ACID FOOD IN IV D 5 NO EATING IN WORK SPACE IV D 5

WORK AREA
OPERATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT
HAZARD SEVERITY: PURPOSE: ORM is the process used at

all levels to identify risks
Category I - The hazard may cause
associated with military operations
death, loss of facility/asset or
and includes risk assessment, risk
result in grave damage. decision making and implementation of
Category II - The hazard may cause risk controls.
severe injury, illness and/or property PROCESS:
damage.
1. Identify the hazards:
Category III - The hazard may cause
minor injury, illness, or property a. Outline major steps in the
damage. operations
Category IV - The hazard presents b. List hazards associated with each
minimal threat to personnel and step.
equipment.
c. List all possible causes for
PROBABILTY: hazards.
Category A - Likely to occur 2. Assess the hazards:
immediately. a. For each hazard identified,
Category B - Probably will occur in determine the degree of risk in terms
time. of probability and severity. Use the
matrix to assign a RAC to each hazard.
Category C - May occur in time.
Category D - Unlikely to occur. 3. Risk assessment.
RISK ASSESSMENT MATRIX a. Start with the most serious risk.
b. Select risk controls that will
reduce risk to a minimum.
c. with controls in does the benefit
PROBABILITY outweigh the risk.
d. If controls are needed contact your
SEVERITY A B C D chain of command
4. Implement controls.
I 1 1 2 3
a. Administrative
b. Engineering controls.
II 1 2 3 4
c. PPE
III 2 3 4 5 5. Supervise.
a. Conduct follow-up.
IV 3 4 5 5 b. Stay flexible.
c. Take corrective action.
RAC DEFINITIONS: Never accept unnecessary risks!
If it looks like a hazard it
1-CRITICAL probably is!
2-SERIOUS
3-MODERATE
4-MINOR
5-NEGLIGIBLE
***Use common sense at all times***
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
POWER PLANNING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
ECC E23
10/1/2015
1
(a) KNOWLEDGE-BASED
1. Without the aid of reference, identify how to convert between

volt-amperes and watts when operating tactical generators per Field
Manual 20-31 (Engine-Driven Electrical Generator Sets) (0602-MNGT-
1702h).
2. Without the aid of reference, identify the types of output

phases used in tactical generators per Field Manual 20-31 (Engine-
Driven Electrical Generator Sets) (0602-MNGT-1702m).
3. Without the aid of reference, identify the voltages associated

with the two types of output phases used in tactical generators per
Field Manual 20-31 (Engine-Driven Electrical Generator Sets) (0602-
MNGT-1702l).
4. Without the aid of reference, identify the benefits of using a

3-Phase generator per Field Manual 20-31 (Engine-Driven Electrical
Generator Sets) (0602-MNGT-1702n).
5. Without the aid of reference, state the four utilities

Military Occupational Specialties (MOS) that directly relate to power
planner per MCO 1200.17A (MOS Manual) (0602-MNGT-1702r).
6. Without the aid of reference, identify the two most common

locations to find electrical power requirements for communications
equipment per Field Manual 20-31 (Engine-Driven Electrical Generator
Sets) (0602-MNGT-1702k).
7. Without the aid of reference, identify the metric used to

measure power output in tactical generators per Field Manual 20-31
(Engine-Driven Electrical Generator Sets) (0602-MNGT-1702p).
8. Without the aid of reference, identify the two electrical

frequencies (Hz) used in tactical generators per Field Manual 20-31
(Engine-Driven Electrical Generator Sets) (0602-MNGT-1702q).
9. Without the aid of reference, identify the purpose of the

Mobile Electric Power Distribution System (MEPDIS) per Technical
Manual 08712A-14/1 (Mobile Electric Power Distribution System) (0602-
MNGT-1702o).
2
10. Without the aid of reference, state how to configure signal
and power cables if their paths must cross per Technical Manual 6110-
OI/1 (Mobile Electric Power Distribution System - Replacement) (0602-
MNGT-1702s).
11. Without the aid of reference, state which generators in the

USMC are capable of being employed in parallel per Technical Manual
12359A-OD/B (Technical Characteristics of Expeditionary Power System
Equipment) (0602-MNGT-1702t).
12. Without the aid of reference, state the optimum percent

utilization for tactical generators when employed in parallel per
Technical Manual 12359A-OD/B (Technical Characteristics of
Expeditionary Power System Equipment) (0602-MNGT-1702u).
(b) PERFORMANCE-BASED
1. Given a tactical scenario and equipment requiring electrical

power, calculate the connected load requirement for the equipment to
satisfy the commander's communications system requirements for command
and control during a field exercise per Field Manual 20-31 (Engine-
Driven Electrical Generator Sets) (0602-MNGT-1702i).
2. Given a tactical scenario, equipment requiring electrical

power, identify critical systems requiring electrical power to satisfy
the commander's communications systems requirements for command and
control during a field exercise per Field Manual 20-31 (Engine-Driven
Electrical Generator Sets) (0602-MNGT-1702j).

equipment and commander's initial planning guidance, identify power
requirements of communication equipment in order to support the
during a field exercise, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications System)
(0602-PLAN-1102cs).
3
INTRODUCTION
Electrical power is a little bit like the air you breathe - you
don't really think about it until it is missing. It is only during a
power failure, when you walk into a dark room and instinctively hit the
useless light switch that you realize how important power is in your
daily life. You use it for heating, cooling, cooking, refrigeration,
light, sound, computation, entertainment... Without it, life can get
somewhat cumbersome. Ask yourself the following questions: Do you ever
wonder how power is generated or how it makes its way across vast expanses
of land into your home to power your television, water heater, or
microwave? In the civilian world power travels from the power plant to
your house through an amazing system called the power distribution grid.
A model of a civilian power distribution grid is provided below.
The grid is quite public - if you live in a suburban or rural area,

chances are it is right out in the open for all to see. It is so
public, in fact, that you probably don't even notice it anymore. Your
brain likely ignores all of the power lines because it has seen them so
often.
Electrical power starts at the power plant. In almost all cases,
the power plant consists of a spinning electrical generator. Something
has to spin that generator - it might be a water wheel in a hydroelectric
dam, a large diesel engine (as is often the case in the Marine Corps)
or a gas turbine. Steam turbine engines are used very often in civilian
power generation. The steam might be created by burning coal, oil or
natural gas. Or the steam may come from a nuclear reactor.
4
WHY CONDUCT POWER PLANNING? WHAT’S IN IT FOR YOU?
Electrical power is among the most important considerations for

planning a communications network. As a Communications Officer creates
a Communications Plan to support the tactical Scheme of Maneuver (SOM)
and allocates specific communications personnel and equipment to support
the Commander’s information exchange requirements, he or she must also
consider the power requirements for the communications equipment to be
employed. Mobile Electric Power Generators (MEP-G) are typically
installed to provide a significant portion of the power required during
expeditionary operations. In fact, much of the equipment used to
establish a broadband communications network is not capable of being
powered solely by batteries. Such systems include the Transition Switch
Module (TSM), the Tactical Access Concentrator (TAC-300), MRC-142C,
Deployable Integrated Transport Suite (DITS), routers, switches, etc.
Furthermore, batteries are not an economical power source and should be
avoided when possible, thus, we need to develop our own tactical power
grid.
Moreover, we may not have the support of an Engineer Section,
Combat Engineer Battalion (CEB), or Engineer Support Battalion (ESB)
that are composed of Marines who specialize in helping us determine our
power requirements. Therefore, as Communications planners, we need to
have some basic knowledge of power sources, power distribution systems,
and power planning. During this period of instruction, we will examine
the equipment used to generate and transport power through a tactical
power grid to the communications equipment and facilities within a
communications network. You will be given the basic knowledge-based
skills to effectively communicate with specialized Marines such as
electricians, generator mechanics, and Utilities Chiefs/Officers, and
the performance-based skills necessary to conduct limited power planning
to support the tactical communications networks you have been trained to
plan, install, operate, and maintain.
ELECTRICAL CONCEPT REVIEW
Voltage (V or E): The electrical force that drives an electric

current.
Current (I): The flow of electric charge.
Resistance (R): A measure of opposition to the passage of electric

current.
Power (P): The rate at which electrical energy is transferred by an

electric circuit.
5
Direct Current (DC): The unidirectional flow of electric charge. A
common source for a DC circuit is a battery.
Alternating Current (AC): Current which constantly changes in

amplitude, and which reverses direction at regular intervals. A
common source for an AC circuit is a generator.
Ohm’s Law: States that the current through a conductor between two
points is directly proportional to the potential difference or voltage
across the two points, and inversely proportional to the resistance
between them.
I = V/R or V = IR or R = V/I
Joule’s Law: States that when electricity flows through a substance,

the rate of evolution of heat in watts equals the resistance of the
substance in ohms times the square of the current in amperes.
P = RI2 or P = (V/I)I2 or P = IV
***Joule’s Law is true for DC circuits and AC circuits if the Power

Factor is 1***
Power Factor (pf): The ratio of the true power flowing to the load to
the apparent power. The pf is a dimensionless number between 0 and 1.
pf = (true power) / (apparent power)
True power is the capacity of the circuit for performing work in

a particular time (measured in watts); this is the actual amount of
power being supplied to the load devices in order to operate.
Apparent power is the product of the current and voltage of the
circuit (measured in volt-amperes); this is the amount of power that
appears to be distributed with factoring in loss. Due to energy
stored in the load and returned to the source (reactive power), or due
to a non-linear load that distorts the wave shape of the current drawn
from the source, the apparent power will be greater than the real
power.
6
True Power/Apparent Power Conversion Equation:
True Power(Watts) = Apparent Power(Volt-Amperes) X Power Factor
***THIS IS NOT ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 101. WE ARE NOT GOING TO PROVE

THIS. HOWEVER, THIS IS HOW YOU CONVERT BETWEEN “VOLT-AMPERES” AND
WATTS.***
ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION
Electrical power is an essential element of military operations.

Without it, many crucial systems would cease to operate. Command,
control, communications, and intelligence functions are highly reliant
on dependable electrical power. Administrative, health service support,
and logistical support operations would also be seriously jeopardized
without it. In fact, even some weapons systems are dependent on
electrical power for operation. The result of this growing dependence
on electricity is a continual increase in the quantity and quality of
power required to support operations. The indispensable nature of
electrical power compels commanders and planners to recognize their
electrical power needs and ensure that those needs are met. Often this
is through the use of tactical generators.
Tactical military generators operate either single-phase or three-

phase output electric power. Tactical single-phase power grids run at
120 volts while tactical three-phase power grids run at 208 volts (at
the generator).
(a) Single-Phase: Single-phase electric power refers to the

distribution of alternating current electric power using a system in
which all the voltages of the supply vary in unison. Single-phase
distribution is used when loads are mostly lighting and heating, with
few large electric motors. A single-phase supply connected to an
alternating current electric motor does not produce a revolving magnetic
field; single-phase motors need additional circuits for starting, and
such motors are uncommon above 3 or 10 kW in rating.
In the single-phase three-wire system, one of the three wires from

the generator is connected to the ground and is called the grounded wire
or the grounded circuit conductor which provides an electrical path that
is normally designed to carry fault current within electrical equipment.
The other wires are called the hot wire and the neutral wire. The hot
wire provides the actual power for your equipment while the neutral wire
provides a reference point within an electrical distribution system.
Normally the voltage difference between the reference and hot wire is
120 volts. Single-phase, 120- volt loads typically include light bulbs,
portable tools, and equipment requiring low power.
7
Single-Phase Simplified: Single-phase power is what you have in
your house. You generally talk about household electrical service as
single-phase, 120-volt AC service. If you use an oscilloscope and look
at the power found at a normal wall-plate outlet in your house, what you
will find is that the power at the wall plate looks like a single sine
wave with an effective voltage of 120 volts. The rate of oscillation for
the sine wave is 60 cycles per second.
(b) Three-Phase: In a three-phase system, the currents in each

conductor reach their peak instantaneous values sequentially, not
simultaneously; in each cycle of the power frequency, first one, then
the second, then the third current reaches its maximum value.
Three-Phase Simplified: Civilian power plants produce three

different phases of AC power simultaneously, and the three phases are
offset 120 degrees from each other. There are five wires coming out of
every power plant and every three phase tactical generator: the three
phases plus a neutral and ground common to all three. If you were to
look at the three phases on a graph, they would look like this relative
to ground:
There is nothing magical about three-phase power. It is simply

three single phases synchronized and offset by a phase difference of
120 degrees. A three-phase system is generally more economical than
others because it uses less conductor material to transmit electric power
vice the equivalent single-phase system at the same voltage. Three-phase
power distribution also provides better redundancy than single-phase. If
one phase drops within a three-phase power distribution system, the
remaining two phases will still function properly. In a single phase
system, you are limited to the one phase and if equipment problems
negatively affect that phase, you will lose all power. Three-phase power
is the most common method used by electric power distribution grids
worldwide to distribute power. High power electric motors typically
require three-phase power due to their power requirement (mainly at
startup). Air conditioners also typically require three-phase power
since the power draw is significant when the compressor initially comes
on. There is some communications equipment that requires 3-phase power
such as the AN/TSC-156 Phoenix but this is very uncommon for comm.
equipment. As Communications planners, the primary three-phase equipment
that you will deal with will be air conditioners.
8
From the military perspective, electrical power encompasses the
entire spectrum of power generation and distribution systems that support
military operations. It ranges from the power produced by the smallest
tactical generator, to the power distributed by commercial power plants
and their associated transmission and distribution systems. The power
continuum is broken down into three groups:
– Tactical Generators
– Prime Power
– Commercial Power
a. Tactical Generators range from 2kW to 200kW, and are standard

military portable generator sets. They provide a mobile source of power
to units operating in a tactical environment; distribution systems for
tactical generators are usually very simple and in the Marine Corps
consist of the following:
(1) Mobile Electric Power Distribution System (MEPDIS)

(2) Field Wiring Harness Set (FWHS)
(3) Mobile Electric Power Distribution System Replacement
(MEPDIS-R).
b. Prime Power is reliable commercial-grade utility power

continuously generated by non-tactical generators ranging in size from
200kW to 750kW.
(1) Commercial generators require site preparation for

installation.
(2) They also require the use of transformers and
distribution equipment.
(3) Prime power usually requires the construction of
nonstandard distribution networks.
(4) Prime power when operating at 60Hz has an output
voltage of 240/416 volts 3 phase. This voltage is known as a medium
voltage.
(5) Prime power can replace existing power sources such as
large concentrations of tactical generators and make available these
generators for tactical use.
c. Commercial Power plants and their transmission and

distribution systems are fixed nonstandard systems. These power systems
are part of the a location’s infrastructure as are other utility systems.
Commercial power is typically provided by a host nation(s).
(1) Worldwide voltage and frequency is not always the same

as in the United States.
(2) Some equipment is sensitive and will not operate

properly when powered by a source with different voltage and/or
frequency.
9
(3) If your equipment is going to be connected to
commercial power in a foreign country, you must first check to see if
that countries electrical system is operating on a voltage and
frequency you can use. For example, France uses both 50Hz and 25Hz at
various voltages. If you have a piece of equipment like a desktop
computer that requires 120 volts and you plug it into 240 volts
(European standard), you will blow the power supply!
UTILITIES MARINES
There are four different Marines that are available to help with
the planning, installation, operation and maintenance of a power grid to
support your communications equipment.
MOS 1141 (PVT to SSgt): Electrician. Using knowledge of electrical theory

and concepts, Electricians install, operate, maintain, and repair
underground, above ground, and overhead electrical power distribution
systems.
MOS 1142 (PVT to SSgt): Engineer Equipment Electrical Systems Technician

(Generator Mechanic). Using knowledge of electrical theory and concepts,
and electronic fundamentals, Engineer Equipment Electrical Systems
Technicians repair electric motors, electronic modules, motor control
circuits, and electric power generation equipment.
MOS 1169 (GySgt to MGySgt): Utilities Chief. Utilities chiefs are

technical advisers at all levels of all elements of the MAGTFs on the
employment of utilities support. These staff noncommissioned officers
analyze, translate, and execute commanders' operational requirements
into a utilities support reality that enhances mission accomplishment.
MOS 1120 (WO to CWO5): Utilities Officer. Utilities Officers are

technical advisers to the commanders at all levels of all elements of
the MAGTFs on the timely and appropriate employment of utilities support.
These Warrant Officers analyze, translate, and execute commander
operational requirements into a utilities support reality that enhances
mission accomplishment. They plan, manage, and delegate the
establishment, operation, and maintenance of water
filtration/purification, storage, and distribution sites; electric
power generation sites along with the inherent underground, above ground,
and overhead electric power distribution systems; and shower and laundry
services.
10
Key takeaway: These four Marines do not reside at all elements
of the MAGTF. For example, if you are at a Communications Battalion you
will have a Utilities Officer along with multiple Utilities Chiefs and
many Electricians and Generator Mechanics to help you with your power
plan. Conversely, at an Infantry Battalion you may only have an
Electrician and a Generator Mechanic and they will probably not work
directly for you but will likely work in the S-4 shop.
CALCULATING THE LOAD
Selecting generators that can produce the power required for

communications systems is an important function. The operator or person
responsible for this function must select the number and types of
generators that can best meet the network's needs. Normally, a section
of Combat Engineers would determine the power requirements for a
battalion level entity. As Communications planners it is our
responsibility to assist the engineers and utilities Marines in
selecting power sources that will enable our networks to function.
Generally speaking, there are three steps involved in the selecting the
size of a generator. The steps in selecting generator size are listed as
follows:
Step 1. Map the communications network.
Step 2. Compute the Connected Load.
Step 3. Take information produced in steps 1 and 2 to your

senior utilities Marine. Together you will do further planning
for your power grid.
Note: Remember that you are not the power planning expert; ensure
you confer with the proper subject matter experts if they’re available.
Now, utilities Marines will use the information you provide from steps
1 – 2 to possibly do some more refined power calculations as well as
factor in a little overhead to account for growth. The amount of overhead
that they factor will be based on their experience with Marine Corps
power generation and distribution equipment as well as your
communications equipment. This is commonly referred to as the “power
swag.”
You need an accurate total electrical load estimate before you can
properly design a power distribution system for a communications network.
Complete the following steps to determine the communications network’s
total electrical load estimate:
Step 1. Map the communications network. Locate all structures (Combat

Operations Center, Systems Control Center, Technical Control Center,
etc.) that require electrical power and mark them on a map, sketch, or
overlay.
11
Step 2. Compute the Total Connected Load. When planning an electrical
system using one or more of the Marine Corps mobile electric power
systems, you must first determine all the loads that will be connected
to the system. You should already have a detailed layout of the
communications network, site or camp that you supplying power to
(produced in “Step 1”).
1. The connected load is determined by all the electrical loads that

are connected to the system generating power. You must study the site
layout and determine the loads that must be served. You should consider:
a. Structures that will require electrical power.

b. Equipment that will require three-phase power.
c. Equipment that will require single-phase power.
NOTE: You can find electrical power requirements for your

communications equipment in two common locations:
a. Read the data plate located on the piece of equipment in

question.
b. Check the equipment’s technical manual to find the
electrical ratings.
The connected load may be calculated by 100% of watts or kW of all

individual loads drawing power from the system.
Power (P) equals Current (I) multiplied by Voltage (E); or
P = I x E
Watts Amperes Volts
The standard unit of measure for power is Watts or Kilowatts.

However, since voltage is constant in a single power grid, utilities
Marines prefer to talk about power at it relates to the flow of
current (Amps). In example 1 above, you might hear a utilities Marine
say that computer draws 3.2 Amps. In this case, it is assumed that
everyone knows that the voltage of the power grid is 120 volts. As a
result, the connected load may also be calculated by 100% of Amps of
all individual loads drawing power from the system. The formula to
calculate power can be re-written as follows:
Current (I) equals Watts (W) divided by Voltage (E); or
P = I x E
Watts Amperes Volts
12
SKILLS CHECK
Problem #1: If you possess (10) lights and each light has a power
draw of 75 watts and an applied voltage of 120 volts, how much current
is required to run the lights? Use the following formula to calculate
current in amperes:
I = ÷ = Amperes
Problem #2: If you possess (8) laptops rated at 2.4 amperes each with
an applied voltage of 120 volts, how much total power in watts is
required to run the laptops? Use the following formula to calculate
power in watts:
P = X = Watts
All examples that have been covered thus far have required single-
phase power. Most if not all communications equipment requires single-
phase power. There are a few exceptions such as the AN/TSC-156 that
requires three-phase power but in general the air conditioner is the
only piece of equipment that you will frequently employ that requires
three-phase power. If you employ your communications equipment in a hot
climate, you will undoubtedly require the use of air conditioners.
Remember earlier we mentioned something called the power factor?

Just about every piece of equipment that requires three-phase power has
a power factor associated with it. Now, we need to calculate the amperage
per phase to power this air conditioner. Here are the steps to do so:
1. Take total three-phase power requirement for the piece of

equipment (in watts) and divide by 3. This is your power requirement per
phase. This is the True Power per phase.
2. Now, use the following formula to incorporate the power factor

and solve for the Apparent Power.
True Power(Watts) = Apparent Power(Volt-Amperes) X Power Factor
3. Once the Apparent Power in Volt-Amperes is found, simply divide

by 120 volts (single phase voltage) to arrive at the Amperes per phase.
Now let’s see an example…
13
Example:
You are deployed to Afghanistan and require the use of a B008 Air
Conditioner to cool your maintenance shelter. The B008 requires 11kW
of three-phase power to run. The B008 has a Power Factor of .8. What
is the amperage per phase required to power this air conditioner?
11,000W ÷ 3 = 3667 W (per phase)
3667 W = Apparent Power X .8

Apparent Power = 3667 ÷ .8
Apparent Power = 4583 Volt-Amperes
4583 Volt-Amperes ÷ 120 Volt = 38.19 Amperes (per phase)
A B008 requires 38.19 Amperes per phase to run.
SELECTING GENERATORS
Now that we have calculated the Total Connected Load, it’s time
to select a generator. But first, we must plan for growth. Adding in
overhead to account for growth is typically referred to as the “power
swag” or just “swag” as mentioned briefly earlier. After calculating the
Total Connected Load, the rule of thumb for future growth is to add an
additional 20%. Remember this is just the default swag. If you
anticipate a substantial amount of growth over the next month, you may
factor in a 50% swag. Determining swag is situation-dependent, but 20%
is the general rule of thumb. Using the 20% swag, and a Total Connected
Load of 18kW, you would plan for 21.6kW of total power.
Tactical generators are the most common means of power generation

in the Marine Corps. Tactical generators are categorized by the power
output provided by the generator measured in Kilowatts (kW) and operate
at a frequency that is either 50 or 60 hertz (Hz) or both. The following
are the five most common generators that you will employ as Marine Corps
Communications planners:
1. MEP-806B, 60kW, 3-phase

2. MEP-805B, 30kW, 3-phase
3. MMG-25 (MAGNUM), 20kW, 3-phase
4. MEP-803A, 10kW, 1-phase and 3-phase
5. MEP-831A, 3kW, 1-phase
NOTE: For a complete list of technical specifications you can refer to

the Marine Corps Systems Command equipment data sheets.
During your time as Communications planners in the Fleet Marine

Force, you may develop a Communications Network that requires multiple
generator sites in order to power all equipment. However at the
14
Infantry Battalion and Regimental level, this is very uncommon. Most if
not all of the time, you will have a single site for your power generation
equipment. For the remainder of this class, we will talk in terms of
a single generator site or power generation point.
Key Takeaway: Properly calculating the load is the most important

step that you can take as a Communications planner. If you can accurately
articulate your single-phase and three-phase requirements by structure
or location to a utilities Marine, together you will complete the
remainder of the planning required to get power from your power
generation point to the equipment that needs it!
POWER DISTRIBUTION
Power distribution can be thought of like bandwidth. Remember during

Multiplexing, our bandwidth was limited by the smallest pipe? In case
you don’t, a MRC-142C is capable of going up to 16.384 Mbps. However, if
you employ a MRC-142C with a TAC-300as the multiplexer, the MRC-142C
can only go up to 14.336 Mbps because that is the max aggregate that the
TAC-300 can produce. The same concept applies to power distribution. If
you are using a 20 Amp receptacle on a 30kW power distribution panel,
you are limited to 20 Amps of power that you can push through that
circuit. Furthermore, if you are using a 20 Amp receptacle and connect
it to another 20 Amp receptacle with a 10 Amp cable, you are limited to
a 10 Amp power circuit because the 10 Amp cable is now your limiting
factor.
The Mobile Electric Power Distribution System (MEPDIS) was

developed to provide a fast, mobile, and safe means of installing an
electrical distribution system. The MEPDIS can be effective only if you
know how to use it, but first you need to understand its components. The
MEPDIS is used to provide a network for connecting multiple 120/208V, 3
phase loads and 120V, 1 phase loads to a remote generator power or
facility power source. This system provides branch circuit isolation and
protection and is recoverable after field exercises. The cables that
are used with MEPDIS are designed for direct burial (18” deep), ground-
lay, or pole installation. The MEPDIS consists of 15kW, 30kW, and 100kW
power distribution panel board assemblies. These assemblies are skid
mounted; the 30kW and 100kW assemblies have eye bolts for lifting and
towing. The assemblies are housed in a water resistant cabinet that
protects the circuit breakers and wiring. The circuit breakers are
accessed by unlatching and raising the hinged cabinet cover. Input and
output receptacles are also protected by covers. The individual power
board assemblies are linked together by cables which allow for a wide
range of configurations. Here is a picture of MEPDIS equipment:
15
The Mobile Electric Power Distribution System – Replacement
(MEPDIS-R) has replaced the legacy MEPDIS and FWHS, and was developed to
provide a faster, mobile, and a more flexible means of distributing
electricity. MEPDIS-R has many similarities to the original MEPDIS;
however there are some significant differences that make it more user
friendly. The circuit breakers are magnetic induced vise heat sensitive.
Also, it uses International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)
connectors vise metal hubs which can be purchased worldwide. The MEPDIS-
R consists of 5kW (indoor), 5kW (outdoor), 15kW, 30kW, 100kW, and 300kW
power distribution panel board assemblies which are commonly referred to
as “turtles.” MEPDIS-R breaks down to smaller panels (5kW) to reduce
your voltage drop and eliminate the need for a FWHS. MEPDIS-R has
multiple inputs allowing you to use the panels to parallel generator
sets together with a means of disconnect. This concept of “paralleling”
will be discussed in more detail towards the end of this lesson.
MEPDIS-R 30kW Panel
Note: MEPDIS and the FWHS have been replaced throughout the Marine
Corps with MEPDIS-R. For the remainder of this class, we will solely
discuss MEPDIS-R as the means of power distribution.
MEPDIS-R Panels are arranged in descending order setup. For

example, starting closest to the generator, a 100kW panel would be used
to feed a 30kW panel and the 30kW would feed a 15kW panel, etc.
The limits to the number of panels each of the larger size panel
can feed are restricted to the connected loads and the available
connection points. MEPDIS-R panels do not consume power; rather, they
distribute electrical energy through circuits. Therefore, a 30kW panel
could feed three 15kW panels provided the sum of all the panels does not
exceed the main breaker of the 30kW panel. Likewise, the 100kW panel
may appear to be feeding many panels in the system, but it is the total
current draw from all the loads that must be considered. Here is a very
basic example of how power distribution would be setup…
16
Now let’s talk about some specifics of MEPDIS-R. MEPDIS-R is made
up of six separate systems.
(1) 300kW Power Distribution Panel

(5) 5kW Power Distribution Panel Outdoor Model
(6) 5kW Power Distribution Panel Indoor Model
When constructing a power distribution plan, you should start with

the next highest turtle than the generator that you require. For example,
if your power requirements require that you use a MEP-806B rated at 60kW,
you should utilize a 100kW turtle as your main distribution turtle. From
there you would branch off to 30kW turtles and then to 15kW turtles and
then to 5kW outdoor and indoor turtles. Could you skip a turtle along
the way (i.e. not utilize a 15kW and go straight from a 30kW to a 5kW
turtle)? That all depends. You can skip a turtle as long as your power
requirements are still met by the smallest circuit and that the
connectors of each panel match. All in all, the detailed planning of a
power distribution grid should be done WITH a utilities Marine.
PLANNING AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
This section includes crucial information pertinent to power

planning for the Communications planner. In this section we will discuss
4 sub-topics:
a. Selecting generator sites

b. Employing generators in parallel
17
c. Wet stacking
d. Grounding generators and power distribution systems
a. Selecting generator sites
Once the communications site, node or camp is broken down into

power grids and generators have been selected, the Network Planner must
select generator sites and record them by including them on the map of
the communications site, node or camp layout. Remember you are in the
planning stage and must adjust along each step as required upon
discovering new situations or ideas.
You must consider several factors when selecting a generator

site.
1. The generator site should provide adequate protection.

a. Know to provide protection from the elements of weather.
b. Know to provide protection from enemy.
2. The generator site must provide enough space to perform

maintenance on the equipment.
a. The site must provide space for drip pans.
b. Methods of delivering fuel.
c. Accessibility in the event the generator must be replaced.
d. Room for the operator and mechanics to safely perform
maintenance.
3. When using generators, equipment noise should be considered when

selecting a generator site.
4. When selecting a generator site consider ventilation.
5. When selecting generator sites consider the terrain.
a. The terrain should offer ground that is level enough so

that the generator does exceed a 15% angle. This prevents
unnecessary equipment wear of the engine.
b. The terrain should provide good ground stability to support
the equipment in case of hard rains.
c. The terrain should also provide good drainage. Standing
water can pose a hazard to equipment and personnel.
d. Consider the type of support equipment (e.g. forklifts,
trucks, cranes, etc.) and the terrain they may have to
negotiate in order to provide support when servicing your
generators. Ask yourself the following questions: Is a road
required? Are there too many hills that may make it a
hazard to refuel or move a new generator into the site?
The last consideration in selecting generator sites is where your

power wiring and cabling will run. It is important that power wiring and
cabling be kept separated from signal cables, telephone wire, etc,
because the electric and magnetic fields being produced by the power
18
line can degrade and interfere with the communications signals travelling
through your signal (transmission) lines. Primarily, avoid laying signal
and power lines parallel to one another. Keep them separated by 10 feet
or more wherever possible. If they must cross, it should be done at
right angles, with at least 2 feet of separation. Running power lines on
the ground and over-heading signal lines is one excellent approach. Where
over-heading is not practical, have signal and power lines approach the
equipment from different directions if possible.
b. Employing generators in parallel
Situations may occur when a communications agency with only small

and medium-sized generators on the Table of Equipment (T/E) or Equipment
Density List (EDL) require a large amount of power. This can be done
by connecting and operating two or more generator sets in parallel. When
generator sets are connected in this manner, their combined kilowatt
rating is equal to the sum of the kilowatt rating for each set.
Generator sets may also be connected in parallel to provide
continuous power and to allow shutdown time for servicing the equipment.
Installations that require continuous power, such as COC, SYSCON or
TECHCON, use parallel-connected generator sets to avoid power outages.
Generator sets are shut down and serviced periodically. When they are
connected in parallel, one set can be shut down and serviced while the
other continues to operate. Thus, an installation can receive continuous
power with no time lost for maintenance and repair. THE KEY HERE IS THE
POWER REQUIREMENT OF YOUR EQUIPMENT MUST NOT EXCEED THE CAPACITY OF ONE
GENERATOR. IF IT DOES, WHEN YOU SHUT DOWN ONE OF THE GENERATORS, THE
SECOND GENERATOR WILL NOT BE ABLE TO HANDLE THE LOAD.
Note: Parallel generator sets must be synchronized before

connecting them to the load. Ask trained electricians if you are unsure
if your generators have been synchronized.
Key Takeaway: In the USMC, all generators that are rated at 30kW
and above are capable of being run in parallel. If at all possible, you
should strive to run generators in parallel IOT ensure uninterrupted
power during periods of preventative or corrective maintenance.
c. Wet Stacking
We just covered paralleling generators. One of the pitfalls with

paralleling generators is underutilization. When a generator is
underutilized a condition called “wet stacking” can occur. Wet stacking
is a condition in diesel engines in which all the fuel is not burned and
passes on into the exhaust system. In diesel generators, it is usually
because the generator is running at a very small percentage of its total
power capacity. A wet exhaust stack is detectable when there is
“black ooze” around the exhaust pipe
19
connections (hence a wet stack). Wet stacking will cause mechanical
failure of your generator which will result in a power outage. To avoid
wet-stacking you should run your generators at 30% utilization or
greater. Since you should not exceed 50% utilization if you want to
parallel generator sets, the optimum percent utilization for tactical
generators is between 30% and 40% (when employed in parallel).
Note: Percent utilization can be checked for any given generator by

checking the percent utilization gauge located on the generator.
d. Grounding generators and power distribution systems
Tactical generators are designed to provide 3 phase, 4- or 5- wire,

120-208 V AC electric power. Grounding of the generator to earth is
essential to place the generator at earth potential, preventing hazards
to operators and draining static charges or stray currents harmlessly to
earth. The generator neutral output terminal is intentionally bonded
to the generator grounding terminal on its frame or chassis which is
then connected to earth. A 5-wire power cable or the addition of a fifth
conductor to older 4-wire cables establishes the fault protective ground
path from generator to load (safety, protective, or green wire ground).
No current flows in the protective ground conductor unless there is a
fault.
Generators are grounded using one or more rods connected in

parallel. The resistance of generator grounds must be 10 ohms or less,
achieved by connecting the necessary number of rods in parallel and
treating the soil around each rod with salt and water. The generator is
connected to the ground rod(s) using the shortest practical length of
#6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) copper wire or larger. Ideally, the ground
conductor would be insulated, and five feet or less in length to the
nearest ground rod.
The equipment provided with electric power is the load. Each is

grounded using the shortest practical insulated copper wire, #6 AWG or
larger. All tactical equipment that requires grounding for fault
protection is provided with grounding terminals for this purpose. Some
single-phase powered equipment do not require earth grounding since they
are effectively grounded through their power cable to protective ground.
The grounding requirements for the particular equipment are stated in
its operator’s manual, and should be followed exactly.
Whenever parallel connected generators are used, their neutrals

are to be bonded together and connected to the ground system at the same
point. Each generator ground terminal is connected by its own conductor
to the same ground rod. Never connect ground conductors from generator
to generator in series and then to ground to avoid causing noise within
the power system.
20
Example Power Plan:
Example Power Plan
• Once you complete steps 1 and 2 for

calculating the load (1. Map the
communications network; 2. Compute the
connected load), you will sit down with a
Utilities Marine and develop your power
plan.
• The following five slides contain an
example of a simple but thorough power
plan (including both battery management
and the MEP plan)… 61
21
Power Study
Equipment Number Power Total

STE 3 .7 A 2.1 A
Toughbook 3 4.74 A 14.22 A
Laptop 3 4.74 A 14.22 A
Charger 6 1.5 9A
RSAM 1 10 10 A
Layer 2 Switch 1 2 2A
MRC-142 1 4.5 A 4.5 A
VoIP 3 .5 A 1.5 A
Projector 1 3.1 A 3.1 A
Router 1 2A 2A
Printer 1 4A 4A
DDSR LSM* 1 16 A 16 A
TOTAL 82.64 A
20% Swag 99.04 A
* DDSR LSM must be placed on its own drop

64
15 kW Turtle Laydown
Drop 1 Equipment Amps Drop 3 Equipment Amps
1. Printer 4A Projector 3.1 A
2. Toughbook 4.74 A 2. MRC-142 4.5 A
3. STE .7 A STE .7 A
4. Laptop 4.74 A Router 2A
Drop 2 Equipment Amps Drop 2 Equipment Amps
1. RSAM 10 1. Toughbook 4.74
2. Layer 2 2 2. Laptop 4.74
Switch
3. VoIP .5 3. VoIP .5
4. VoIP .5 4. Laptop 4.74
Drop
Legend 1. 2.
•Laptops and tough-
Books are employed
with chargers 3. 4.
65
22
Battery Plan
• BB-2590s should be changed every 8 hours

– Discharged batteries should be charged immediately
– Consistent rotation of batteries is essential
• AN/GRA-39 batteries should be changed every 16 hours
• PRC-153 batteries will be changed as necessary and consistently rotated
on the charger
• MBITR batteries will be changed as necessary, and consistently rotated on
the charger
• Depleted batteries, or batteries that fail to hold a charge will be labeled
“Used”
• Batteries will be checked out with Utilities Chief or designated Battery NCO.
• Any radio flashing “hud low” will have HUB replaced prior to loading any fills
and crossing LD.
62
Power coordinating Instructions
• Units will NOT plug anything into UPS except SL-3

equipment
• Units will inform Utilities Chief BEFORE plugging
anything in anywhere
• Units will monitor generators every 2 hours for fuel
level
• Fuel level must not fall below ½ tank
– Coordinate refuel with Utilities Chief
• Hz level must remain between 50 and 60 Hz
• Voltage level must remain at 120 V
• DDSR can have only (1) laptop plugged into it for
configuring; NOTHING else
65
23
POWER PLANNING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PRACTICAL APPLICATION
Scenario: You are the Battalion S-6 and Communications planner for 1st
Battalion, 8th Marines. You are conducting power planning for your
command’s final work-up exercise, Enhanced Mojave Viper (EMV), aboard
the MAGTF Training Center, 29 Palms, California. You need to supply power
to the Battalion Combat Operation Center, Systems Control Center, and
Technical Control Facility. The communications systems present within
each facility are listed below. Ultimately, you need to determine the
size and quantity of mobile electric power generators and distribution
systems required to support each facility.
Guidance: Remember, your generators provide 120 volts Alternating

Current (AC). The communications systems and MEP-G/MEPDIS-R equipment
listed below are all SL3 complete and present on your command’s EDL.
Question #1. Using the communications equipment specifications provided

(Appendix D) and the equations contained in this handout, begin your
planning by calculating the connected load for each communications
system.
TECHNICAL CONTROL FACILITY
Equipment Qty Amps Volts Watts Total

Amps/Watts
RSAM 1 /
CISCO 3845 Router 1 /
CISCO 3750 Switch 2 /
APC 2500 Smart UPS 2 /
TAC-300 4 /
AN/MRC-142C RT Set 4 /
Lenovo ThinkPad 3 /
Light Set 3 /
TOTAL /
24
SYSTEMS CONTROL CENTER

Amps/Watts
Lenovo ThinkPad 8 /
Portable Projector 1 /
PP-8498 2 /
TOTAL /
COMBAT OPERATIONS CENTER

Amps/Watts
Lenovo ThinkPad 16 /
Portable Projector 2 /
PP-8498 1 /
TOTAL /
Question #2. You notice that the Operations Chief who works in the COC
and your Communications Chief who monitors the network from the SYSCON
like to hang out and drink coffee. The two of them are such the coffee
snobs that they each bought Techivorm Moccamaster KBT741 coffee pots.
The Operations Chief bought 1 that he plans to run in the COC and your
Communications Chief bought 1 that he plans to run in the SYSCON.
Transfer your connected load from question 1 and re-calculate
your connected load for the COC and SYSCON.
Initial Final
Facility Connected Load Connected Load
Amps / Watts Amps / Watts
TECHCON / /
SYSCON / /
COC / /
Question #3. Transfer the connected load calculated in Question 2. Refer

to Appendix A to determine the size of generator you require for each
facility and place it in table below. Remember at this point we are
selecting a generator so ensure you incorporate a 20% swag for growth.
Also, due to space and logistics constraints, you are limited to 1
generator site.
25
Total Connected
Facility Load Generator(s) Required
Kilowatts
COC, TECHCON,
SYSCON
Question #4. Refer to Appendix B. Determine the main power distribution

panel you require to distribute the power provided by the generator you
identified in Question #3 to the equipment located in the facilities
listed below.
MEPDIS-R
Facility Generator Power Distribution
Panel
Generator Site
TECHCON N/A
SYSCON N/A
COC N/A
SUMMARY
Having stable and reliable power is crucial to your communications

network because without it, your equipment cannot run. The majority of
communications equipment requires simple single-phase power but some
items like the AN/TSC-156 Phoenix and air conditioners require three-
phase power to run. Being able to accurately convey your single and
three phase power requirements to a utilities Marine is a critical skill
to have as a Communications planner. After computing the power
requirements, it is crucial to select the correct power generation and
distribution equipment in order to provide uninterrupted power to your
critical communications equipment. It is optimal to run generators in
parallel IOT ensure uninterrupted power but always be mindful of wet-
stacking and other safety and planning considerations that must be
accounted for when adding a second generator to your power grid.
REFERENCES
1. FM 20-31 Electrical Power Generation and Distribution Systems

2. Field electrical power and distribution systems student outline,
Marine Corps Engineer School
3. How Stuff Works.com; Marshall, 2010
26
Appendix D: Electrical Specifications of Common Communications
Equipment
AN/TTC-63
REMOTE SUBSCRIBER ACCESS MODULE
(RSAM)
The RSAM requires the following minimum power requirement:
Input Voltage-----------120V
Amperage----------------6.25 Amperes
REFERENCE: \ECC\Reference Material\AN TTC 62 & 63 (TSM)\AN TTC 63

(RSAM)\Quick Reference Guides
CISCO EQUIPMENT
Cisco 3845 Router:------10 Amperes at 120V

Cisco 3750 Switch:------1 Ampere at 120V
REFERENCE: www.cisco.com
American Power Conversion (APC) Smart-UPS 2500
Input voltage:----------120V
Input current:----------20 Amperes
REFERENCE: www.apc.com
PP-8498/U
Soldier Portable Charger
Multi-Port Universal battery Charger
AC Operation ----------- Automatic selection: 90 to 260 VAC, single phase, 47

to 420 Hz, with 6.5 ft. detachable three-wire power cord. (Power Draw at
120V = 3 amps)
REFERENCE: \BCOC\Reference Material\PP-8498\TM-11099A-OI
EMI Hardened Stringable Light Set
Current Draw .35 Amperes at 120V
REFERENCE: http://www.marcorsyscom.usmc.mil/sites/PMEPS/TentLight.asp
27
Lenovo R61 ThinkPad
Input Power 2.4 amps at 120V
REFERENCE: Lenovo Power Cord and www.lenovo.com
TAC-300 Case
Tactical ATM Concentrator
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 6 Amp max draw
REFERENCE: \BCOC\Reference Material\AN MRC 142\TAC300 Manuals\24001096-009

(operation & install)
AN/MRC-142C
Radio Terminal Set
AC Power Requirements ------- 120 V, 50-60 Hz, single phase, utility class 2C
power at 3.5 amps maximum from an external
power source.
REFERENCE: \BCOC\Reference Material\AN MRC 142\ TM 11375A-OD (MRC 142

Operator Manual) DRAFT MAY 2008
Portable Projector
LT265/LT245
Power Consumption ------------290W in Lamp Normal mode

------------240W in Lamp Eco mode
------------12W in Standby mode
REFERENCE: \BCOC\Reference Material\AN TSQ 239 (V) 4 (COC-UOC)\COCIETM

FRM\COCIETM\COTS_GOTS_Manuals\Projector
Technivorm Moccamaster KBT741
Input Power:--------13 Amperes at 120V
REFERENCE: http://www.sweetmarias.com/sweetmarias/coffee-brewers/technivorm-
brewers.html
28
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
WIDEBAND NETWORK TROUBLESHOOTING
ECC E24
10/1/2015

operational plans, and communications systems architecture, conduct a
Strap-Ex in preparation for a field exercise that satisfies the
during a given operation, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications
System) (0602-MNGT-1701bl).

operational plans, and communications systems architecture, plan for a
rehearsal in preparation for a field exercise that satisfies the
during a given operation, per MCWP 3-40.3 (MAGTF Communications
System) (0602-MNGT-1701bm).

commander's guidance, supervise the execution of a communications
architecture rehearsal to ensure the plan of action and milestones are
met according to commander's guidance that satisfies the commander's
communications system requirements for command and control during a
field exercise, per CJCSM 6231.07D (Joint Network Management and
Control) (0602-MNGT-1701y).

command's multichannel channel radio network when a circuit outage
occurs to ensure that the commander's communications system
1701ad).
5. Given a scenario and operational AN/MRC-142C, demonstrate

knowledge of signal flow through the equipment string from subscriber
to distant end in order to effectively troubleshoot faults and service
degradations per TM 11375A-ID (0602-PLAN-1103cx).
2
IMPACTS OF COMPLEXITY IN THE COMMUNICATIONS FIELD
The key to maintaining a healthy, effective communications network

capable of supporting combat operations is effective communication
control procedures and a solid, systematic troubleshooting process.
Today’s MAGTF communications systems are extremely complex and are
composed of multiple moving parts, each of which function individually
and as a collective to produce real-time, industry-standard services on
the forward edge of the battlefield. We have seen throughout this course
that while each individual device in our networks is fairly simple (e.g.,
network switch, router, computer, phone, etc.), the result of the
interaction amongst the parts can be highly complicated. As a result of
these interactions, unpredictable and seemingly uncontrollable behavior
can occur. Each portion of our network often affects other parts in ways
that, without the experience of our trained operators, simply cannot be
anticipated. With a complex system, it can be extremely difficult, but
unlike war, not impossible, to isolate individual causes and their
effects despite the fact that they are all connected in a complex web.
Like combat, however, our complex systems are subject to the same
nonlinear behavior—extremely small influences can have decisively large
effects. These large effects along with the inherent messy,
unpredictable, and often chaotic behavior brought on by the uncertainty
and stress of the combat environment can be overcome by effective
procedures and standards for conducting communication control and
systematic troubleshooting of service outages and degradations (much
like react/immediate action drills for troops in contact).
OODA LOOP REVISITED
At TBS, you discussed the theory behind the command and control
process and were introduced to a simple model known as the OODA Loop.
You learned that the OODA Loop applies to any two-sided conflict, no
matter who the antagonists are. OODA is an acronym for observation,
orientation, decision, and action, which
describes the basic sequence of the command and
control process; or better yet, a fancy way of
describing our standard thought and decision-
making process. When confronted by a conflict
or challenge (e.g., service outage, degradation,
etc.), we first observe the situation—no matter if
we actively seek the information or it is thrust
upon us. Having observed the situation, we next
orient to it—we make certain estimates,
assumptions, analyses,
and judgments about the situation in order to create a cohesive mental
image. In other words, we try to figure out what the situation means to
us. Based on our orientation, we decide what to do—whether that decision
takes the form of an immediate reaction or a deliberate plan. Then we
put the decision into action. This includes disseminating the decision,
supervising to ensure proper execution, and monitoring
3
results through feedback, which takes us full circle to the observation
phase. Having acted, the situation has changed and so the cycle begins
again.
The lesson of the OODA loop is the importance of generating tempo
in command and control. In other words, speed is an essential element of
effective command and control. Speed in command and control means
shortening the time needed to make decisions, plans, coordinate, and
communicate. We should recognize, however, that the ability and desire
to generate a higher operational tempo does not negate the willingness
to bide time when the situation calls for patience. The aim is not
merely rapid action, but also meaningful action.
OODA LOOP APPLIED
We learned during single-channel radio that the majority of our

issues in communications are due to variables within the equipment
string— physical variables. Configurations, hardware settings, software
settings, and cabling issues make up a large portion of errors within
communications networks. We learned in the Packet Switched Networks
package of this course that troubleshooting efforts, much like with
single-channel radio, should always begin at the Physical layer of the
OSI model. Remember though, our troubleshooting efforts, or the action
portion of the OODA Loop cannot occur until we take time to observe an
issue, orient ourselves to the issue, and then make an informed decision
about how to handle the issue. All too often, troubleshooters jump
immediately into action testing connections, cycling power to devices,
or changing configurations without first observing and orienting
themselves to the issue at hand. Haphazard actions with seemingly small
influences such as these can have decisively large effects. We must weigh
potential second and third order effects of our actions with careful
consideration paid to ensuring that we do not amplify a minor issue into
a catastrophic outage. In the Marine Corps, we strive to isolate service
degradations through deliberate efforts to centralize or segment our
networks in order to narrow down the possibilities for issues while
ensuring that we do not create a larger issue than what had previously
existed.
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCESS
When a service degradation or outage arises, careful, deliberate

coordination takes place between the SYSCON and TECHCON to holistically
assess the issue by observing and orienting themselves to the issue on
the grand scale to analyze system signal flow and then developing an
action for resolving the issue. This is a joint effort to be conducted
by both the SYSCON and TECHCON. No one party acts alone. Both the SYSCON
and the TECHCON must keep detailed logbooks throughout the entire process
to ensure that all steps are tracked accurately. This will aid in
preventing major issues with reporting, shift turnovers, and the tracking
of trends.
4
Both entities should approach the troubleshooting process with
three general steps/goals in mind:
1. Centralize: Centralize the problem to a specific node within

the network. If the outage has occurred between two separate nodes, both
SYSCONs and TECHCONs should coordinate together to identify potential
issues that could have negatively impacted services on their respective
side. Examples of this include generator failure, disconnected cable,
bad weather, etc. If the matter cannot be centralized to one particular
node or if the matter is more complicated than a simple power outage
or disconnected cable, the troubleshooting efforts commence with both
nodes acting in concert with the other through the remaining steps.
RCT-6 SYSCON RCT-6 TECHCON
1/6 SYSCON 1/6 TECHCON
Example Communication Control Relationships
Notice in the figure above that the RCT-6 SYSCON coordinates with
both, the 1st Battalion, 6th Marines SYSCON and the RCT-6 TECHCON. There
is no communication between the RCT-6 SYSCON and the 1/6 TECHCON. Both
TECHCONs have direct routes to each other to coordinate as required. The
RCT-6 SYSCON and TECHCON are the senior communication control entities
within this network. Ultimately, 1/6 takes direction from RCT-6.
A single outage on a network typically results from an issue at
only one node. Both SYSCONs are responsible for observing and orienting
themselves to the issue and then developing a single course of action
as determined by the senior SYSCON. In other words, the observations at
both nodes feed into a larger picture for the senior SYSCON to make a
decision on a course of action.
SLICE
3302 3302
TAC-300 KIV-7M KIV-7M TAC-300
KIV-7 KIV-7
AN/MRC-142C Link from RCT-6 to 1/6 with NIPR Outage
5
In the Centralize phase of the troubleshooting process, the RCT-6
SYSCON coordinates with both the RCT-6 TECHCON and the 1/6 SYSCON to
attempt to centralize the outage to either node. Both TECHCONs walk the
equipment string to ensure that there are no easily identifiable issues
such as a missing or disconnected cable, power outage, etc.
2. Localize: Once the matter is centralized to a specific system

and/or node, both sites must localize the problem within the equipment
string to a specific component. The simplest way to localize is to
determine if the issue is caused by a problem on the link,
trunk/aggregate, or circuit. In other words, is the transmission media
causing a problem? Is there a problem with the multiplexer or signal
conditioning equipment? Or, is there a problem with a router? The best
way to determine this is to observe the equipment functions via the Man
Machine Interfaces (MMI). Determine the equipment behaviors or symptoms
by simply looking at what the equipment is telling you. Is the GPS Clock
locked on the satellite? Does the trunk encryption device (TED) have
crypto sync? You can tell a lot about what is going on in the network
by simply looking at what the interfaces are telling you.
The most common method of observing for symptoms in Marine Corps
networks is by segmenting the network into two parts utilizing the
RED/BLACK Isolation concept you learned in the Network Encryption lesson
of this annex. You can easily distinguish between whether an outage or
degradation resides on the transmission link or aggregate/trunk by
determining if the TED has crypto sync with the distant end (the TEDs
can see and talk to each other). For the most part, if the TED is synched
with the distant end, the link and all signal conditioning devices on
the link side of the TED are functioning properly.
RED SIDE BLACK SIDE
VIB SLICE
3302
OMNI
AN/GRC-
TAC-300 KIV-7M
245A
CV-HTU-16M
CV-FOM-D
TED
KIV-7
RED/BLACK Isolation Concept
6
Once you have identified if the outage or degradation is on the
BLACK side (no crypto sync), you know that there is most likely an issue
with the transmission link or a signal conditioning device such as a CV-
FOM-D. If the TED has sync, you know that the issue is on the RED side.
This process effectively allows you to segment the network into two
portions and enables you to localize the issue to the link,
trunk/aggregate, or circuit.
3. Isolate: Once you have localized the issue down to the

specific component in the network, you must isolate the issue by checking
interface functionality, physical connections, and configurations. Many
times, issues are caused by bad cables or loose connections.
Troubleshooting should start by reseating a physical connection or
checking receive levels for RF links and potentially taking steps to
improve them (e.g., sweep antennas, increase power, etc.). If the
connections appear to be functional, it is time to move on to
configurations. Refer early and often to system cut sheets that should
be ever-present at each terminal. Many times a simple configuration such
as a timing setting, data rate, or frequency causes the issue.
If after completing the full circuit of checking physical
connections and system configurations with the cut sheets at both nodes
and no issue is found, the troubleshooting process will turn to loopback
testing or a process by which a communication path is connected back
upon itself, either physically or logically, so that the digits sent on
the transmit path are received on the receive path to check for circuit
continuity. Loopback testing is a more complex process typically
performed by trained operators to test the functionality of physical
interfaces and connections that may need to be replaced via the
maintenance cycle. Refer to the Appendix of this publication for examples
of loopback testing for various systems in the MAGTF communications
system.
In more advanced networks you may see
operators and technicians utilize a system called
a FIREBERD to assist in the conduct of physical
layer testing and troubleshooting. They can be
used to verify end-to-end connectivity in order
to isolate problems. They can also be used to
conduct timing analysis
whereby the FIREBERD detects timing problems stemming from propagation
delay or incorrectly timed network elements. Finally, FIREBERDs can be
used for Quality of Service (QoS) testing where the operator/technician
can detect slips, errors, and delays that would otherwise go undetected.
7
REFERENCES

Glossary 2011
8
TRAINING COMMAND
BOX 788251
STUDENT HANDOUT
Network on the Move (NOTM)
ECC EXX
(ECC)
11/15/2016
ENABLING LEARNING OBJECTIVE
1. Without the aid of reference, list the four distinct packages

that comprise the NOTM.
2. Without the aid of reference, provide in writing the purpose

of each of the four Packages.
3. Without the aid of reference, identify which spectrum band

the NOTM multichannel radio uses.
4. Without the aid of reference, describe the signal flow

between all the components of the NOTM.
5. Without the aid of reference, define the purpose of ANW2 and

Fortress in relation to NOTM.
6. Without the aid of reference, describe concepts of employment

for the NOTM in support of different missions.
7. Without the aid of reference, define areas of concern for

maintenance of the NOTM.
1. History of the Network on the Move
During the conflicts in Afghanistan and Iraq, the Marine

Corps generated an Urgent Needs Statements outlining the
requirements for an ability to push a network forward of
established FOBs and COPs and provide data services in an even
more expeditionary manner than before. What is now referred to
as the Network on the Move (NOTM) began as a prototype program
called the MAP/MEP in 2009.
2
Later, this was evolved into a program called Mobile Modular
Command and Control Vehicle (M2C2). This program, tested in
Hawaii, was designed to provide a mobile network designed to
support a company sized COC in an expeditionary manner. This
program saw service both in OIF and OEF as late as 2014, but its
doctrine and use varied depending on the users and local
requirements. This program has been replaced in favor of the
lighter and more capable NOTM.
This figure provides a comparative list of the capabilities

belonging to both the M2C2 and NOTM:
3
2. System Overview
The modern NOTM platform consists of 4 distinct packages:
a. The Tactical Entry Point Modem Kit (TMK) - Provides

termination of the satellite downlink integrated with VSAT-L
networks. This package contains the following components:
– TAMCN A03957G
– MPM-1000 (NCW) ruggedized modem
– CISCO BC Router
– Network Enclaves
– PACSTAR WAN Accelerator
– Workstation CF-19
A good analogy for this kit is the part of the equipment string
that is responsible for allowing connection of the POPV Kit to
the static network: If the rest of the NOTM is the part of the
network that is moving, or pushing forward, the TMK is the part
of the NOTM that ties the rest of it into an existing network so
that the roaming vehicles can “pull” or “tap” into an existing
network with live services.
4
This diagram illustrates the equipment string internal to the
TMK. Notice that on the far right, the output is a combined
network that can now be distributed via the VSAT-L to the POP
Vehicle.
b. The Point of Presence Vehicle Kit (POPV Kit) - Provides

BLOS reachback to rear COC C2 services and acts as Point of
Presence for associated SVKs and SVs. It contains the following
components:
– TAMCN A03877
– Ku-Band SATCOM
– Video Scout CM2
– (2) RT-1949 utilizing ANW2
– Fortress data radio (802.11a and b/g)
– DTECH ruggedized network modules
(bc router, switch, network enclaves)
– MPM-1000 (NCW) ruggedized modem
– TOCNET Soft CAU interface
– Shore Power Module connection
– 0651 admin workstation w/ KVM (keyboard, video, and
mouse) switch
If you conceptualize the NOTM as a series of transfers of

network services, then the COC is the first, existing network,
the TMK allows for the transfer of services via a VSAT-L, and
its first “hop” or arrival point is the Point of Presence
(POPV). This kit might be colloquially referred to as just the
“POP”. It also allows for continued distribution of the network
to the additional packages.
5
This diagram illustrates the equipment string of the POPV Kit.
Notice on the right all the different ways the POPV Kit supports
redistribution of network services.
c. Staff Vehicle Kit (SVK) - Provides extension of C2 services

to users’ Staff Kits via wireless connectivity to the POP
(Fortress/ANW2. There are two SVKs per NOTM! Each one contains
the following:
– TAMCN A03887G
– VRC-114 utilizing ANW2
– Fortress data radio (802.11a)
– SECNET 54 in-line encrypter
If the analogy from the POPV Kit is continued, then the SVK is
the nest “hop” or arrival point for network services. It pulls
its services from the previous hop (the POPV).
6
PRC 117G
(ANW2)
SIPR Client SIPR Router SECNET-54
Black Core
Router
SECNET-54
NIPR Router
NIPR Client
Fortress
SECNET-54 ES 829
MS Client MS Router
This diagram illustrates how the SVK accesses the network

services provided from the POPV (on the right), and eventually
allows for users to access each of the separate networks (on the
left).
d. Staff Kit (SK) - Provides user access to JTCW, COP, email,

chat, VOSIP, ROIP, FMV. Each SK contains the following:
– Panasonic Toughbook CF-19

– TALON (KOV-26) card
– TOCNET Soft CAU interface
– Ancillaries: web cam, cables
– Backpack with integrated docking station, power unit
for use while dismounted
This functions in much the same way as the SVK, except it is man
packable. Just like the SVK, it provides user access to the
network services being provided by the POPV, or it can pull
services from the SVK as a fourth “hop”.
7
This diagram illustrates how the entire NOTM functions together.
Notice that no ranges/distances are provided. This is just a
diagram of the concept of employment.
3. Understanding the Satcom Signal Flow
The NOTM is designed to operate with the VSAT network. A VSAT-L

is required at the static-netwrok location; this is usually the
COC. This will vary depending on your environment, but the key
takeaway is that wherever your VSAT-L is, will also be where
your TMK is, and is therefore the place you are connection your
POPV to the network.
The network, originating at this location, passes through the

TMK, the VSAT-L, and arrives at the POPV. Currently the NOTM
only supports this distribution over the KU band. There is
future planning for X and KA bands. This is a limitation of the
MPM 1000A Modem that comes in the TMK. It uses the Network
Centric Waveform (NCW), which provides efficient sharing of
bandwidth connecting to multiple modems. It can be configures
in the full mesh, hub/spoke, or hybrid configurations. It
supports up to 4 Mbps per carrier.
DISA is discussing the implementation of MPM-1000s in their

Gateways as part of JIE Satcom. This will streamline connection
because the unit would no longer be responsible for providing
8
its own TMK. It would increase the administrative/lead planning
burden because a SAR/GAR would have to be provided.
4. Understanding the Terrestrial Signal Flow
Once the POPV terminates the VSAT-L Link at a forward location,

the network is further extended by terrestrial systems. In its
current configuration, this is accomplished via three separate,
terrestrial systems:
• Fortress ES820
• TALON (KOV 26)
• 117G (ANW2)
In conjunction, these three systems provided different methods

of accessing the network forward-provided by the POPV.
a. Fortress ES-820
The Fortress ES-820 Operates in the 4.4 GHZ band for

communications between the POPV and SVK. This is a military
band. It operates in the 2.4 GHZ band for communications
between POP and SKs, utilizing 802.11 a/b/g/n protocols. It
supports a mesh waveform known as fast path mesh, which in turn
supports a Mobile Adhoc Network, which is said to be self
healing and self forming. For security, the Fortress ES-820
uses the NSA Suite B for encryption, which is a type of AES
encryption but is NOT CCI. It supports up to a 50 Mbps data rate
for users and is field tested as effective up to 500m distance.
b. TALON (KOV-26)
This is essentially a wireless card for individual devices to

connect to the network provided by the POPV. For security it
utilizes NSA Type 1 Encryption/encryptor that IS CCI, so extra
procautions must be taken to maintain positive control of the
device (it is very small compared to other CCI items). It is a
802.11 b/g Wifi Adapter/PCMCIA adapter that supports up to 5
Mbps for the device it is connected to.
c. Harris 117G
You have already learned about the 117G and the waveform ANW2.
As a refresher it is a VHF/UHF Radio that operates in the 30 Mhz
– 2 Ghz range. In the NOTM, it is primarily used for
distributing the network using ANW2 at up to 10 Mbps data rates.
9
5. Future applications
You will notice that unlike the M2C2, which was only designed as
an MRAP compatible addition, the NOTM is modular and has been
envisioned for multi-platform use. This means that the NOTM can
be used to support a wider variety of mission sets. As of May
2016, Tanks are supported by NOTMs that are mounted on AAV
platforms.
The above diagram illustrates the NOTM mounted on the AAV

platform. Future development is already in place to support the
NOTM on the LAV, different variants of the HMMWV, and the JLTV.
10
There is a version of the NOTM, the NOTM A package that is being
reconfigured to support the same type for services from a MV-22
platform. This program is being tested as of November 2016.
6. Employment Considerations
OPFOR units are integrating their TMKs with the VSAT Large
system in a similar to how the MRT is employed in the VSAT
network. It is diagramed like the MRT, as a smaller bubble off
the VSAT-L symbol:
11
POPVs are indicated with a VSAT Symbol that has an uppercase “P”
superimposed. See right of the image.
The NOTMs employment varies.
Unlike many other systems that can be described with a very

specific doctrinal purpose in mind, the book is still being
written on how to employ the NOTM. It will be up to the
commander to decide how to use the NOTM, and it will be up to
you to advise about how it can best be used to enable C2.
Some anecdotal examples for use include:
a. Temporary COC – During the closing months of OEF, as

established networks were being torn down and FOBs were being
turned over to the ANA a need emerged for an ability to continue
data network services beyond the demil point. As the
multichannel radio elements, routers, switches etc. were being
12
torn down on a FOB, the local commander still had data C2
requirements to maintain security and mission effectiveness.
The M2C2, and later NOTM, were used to fill this gap. A NOTM
team would be sent to the FOB prior to the commencement of
demil. Then, as static services were torn down, the functions
of the COC were migrated to the Staff Vehicle Kits and Staff
Kits as these were the best available way to enable C2 outside
of single channel radio. In the end, the M2C2/NOTM could then
continue to provide this support as the Marines themselves
retrograded from the sites, increasing their ability to fight on
the move during their return to Camp Leatherneck (this happened
frequently).
b. Leader’s Recon – Battlefield circulation of high ranking

combatant commanders is critical. However these same decision
makers required robust C2 capabilities, even while conducting
their leader’s reconnaissance’s of the battlespace. The NOTM
provides high ranking decision makers the ability to conduct
leader’s reconnaissance while retaining the ability to C2 across
a spectrum of data related services.
c. Transitory Situational Awareness – during SPMAGTF AFRICA,

a shortfall was discovered and resulted in an Urgent Needs
Statement for the ability of units to receive data services such
as video and intelligence products such as imagery while in
transit. This transitory situational awareness could not be
provided to QRF forces deploying from Rota, Spain while in
flight in any other form than voice. However, the MV22’s
flights to the coast of North Africa could take up to 6 hours at
time, and a lot of variables in a predicted Non Combatant
Evacuation Operation, or Humanitarian Disaster Relief Operation
could change during a six hour transit. In order to supply
transitory forces with increased, real-time situational
awareness of the an American Embassy, a new NOTM program was
developed to allow for network services to be extended to MV-
22’s during transit.
7. The GATR
The AN/TSC-212, though not associated directly with the NOTM is

a related system that you might see in the fleet. It is
commonly referred to as the GATR (the name of the company that
produces the equipment), and is a newly acquired asset that
provides access to the VSAT network in a much smaller package.
It is an inflatable antenna, that can be stowed in the back of
an MV-22, rapidly deployed, rapidly employed, and provide
13
comparable capabilities to the VSAT-L. It supports quad-band
functionality on C, X, Ku and Ka bands.
Some of its features that make its employment desirable are the
following:
a. Extreme Portability
The GATR is 50%-80% less volume and weight than rigid satellite
antennas (single-band terminal packs in 2 cases, weighing under
99 lbs. each).
b. Lower Operating Cost
Lower weight and storage space requirements drastically reduce

shipping expense. But it retains a larger dish which enables
higher bandwidth which lowers satellite access cost.
c. Reliability in Extreme Environments

The GATR has greater stability in high winds (40+mph), and is
durable in extreme temperatures. Additionally this reduces
maintenance costs because a majority of the maintenance costs
associated with rigid satellite systems comes from acquisition
motors/servers getting damaged in high wind environments. As an
14
aside this system has been tested and can be shot/sustain some
battle damage during a firefight and still stay inflated.
d. Ease of Set Up
The GATR sets up in under 30 minutes with no special tools.
15

Echo 1-17

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Echo 1-17

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

EXPEDITIONARY COMMUNICATIONS COURSE

Student Handouts & Supplemental Material

ECC E02 Network Synchronization and Timing

ECC E03 Network Encryption

ECC E04 Signal Conversion

ECC E05 AN-MRC 142C Digital Wideband Transmission System (DWTS)

ECC E06 Strategic Satellite Architecture Overview

ECC E07 Satellite Earth Terminals

ECC E08 AN-USC-65 Lightweight Multiband Satellite Terminal (LMST)

ECC E11 AN-TRC-170 Tropospheric Scatter Microwave Radio Terminal

ECC E12 Wireless Point to Point Link (WPPL)

ECC E13 Very Small Aperture Terminal (VSAT)

ECC E14 Multichannel Radio Network Documentation and Diagrams

ECC E19 Communication Control (COMMCON)

ECC E20 Systems Control

ECC E22 Hazardous Materials Storage and Handling

ECC E23 Power Planning for Communications System

ECC E24 Wideband Network Troubleshooting

ECC EXX Network on the Move

WIDEBAND NETWORKS OVERVIEW

EXPEDITIONARY COMMUNICATIONS COURSE

In general, guided transmission media such as twisted-pair,

MULTICHANNEL RADIO SYSTEMS IN THE MARINE CORPS

In the Marine Corps, multichannel radio transmission systems

MULTICHANNEL RADIO EQUIPMENT

As stated in the single-channel radio annex, radio frequency

1. Terrestrial Radio Frequency Terminals: Include line-of-sight

2. Tactical Satellite Terminals:

MULTICHANNEL RADIO PERSONNEL

1. MOS 0620—Tactical Communications Planning and Engineering

3. MOS 0621—Field Radio Operator: Installs, operates, and

a. MOS 0622 (Legacy) Digital (multi-channel) Wideband

4. MOS 0623—Tropospheric Scatter Radio Multichannel Equipment

5. MOS 0627—Military Satellite Terminal Operator: Installs,

PART 2: INTRODUCTION TO MULTIPLEXING

MUX AGGREGATE MUX

While this multiplexing technology has its obvious advantages, it

As with multichannel radio, multiplexers are typically installed,

1. MOS 0620—Tactical Communications Planning and Engineering

2. MOS 0629—Radio Chief: Senior enlisted advisor on all

3. MOS 0621—Field Radio Operator: Installs, operates, and

4. MOS 2823-Technical Control Chief: Supervises the operation

5. MOS 2821-Technical Controller: Operates technical control

WIDEBAND NETWORK SUPPORT EQUIPMENT AND CONCEPTS

Timing is paramount in communications. Just as we rely on timing

1. MCWP 3-40.3, MAGTF Communications System

SYNCHRONIZATION AND NETWORK TIMING

EXPEDITIONARY COMMUNICATIONS COURSE

1. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Bit Error per

2. Without the aid of reference, define in writing

3. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Slip per

4. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Plesiochronous

5. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Stratum per

6. Without the aid of reference, define in writing External

7. Without the aid of reference, define in writing the purpose of

8. Without the aid of reference, define in writing Clock Recovery

9. Without the aid of reference, define in writing the purpose of

As emphasized throughout the course to this point, time and timing

The need for some sort of synchronization is illustrated in the

NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION THEORY

Synchronization is a networking term that applies to a state where

1. Bit Synchronization: Bit synchronization refers to the need for

2. Time Slot Synchronization: Whenever several links are connected

3. Frame Synchronization: After the data stream of 192 bits of